JP2018114142A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing performance property by allowing a pre-notification of execution of a specific performance.SOLUTION: When a plurality of specific performances are executed, the game machine can execute a second game performance to notify in advance a player of execution of at least one specific performance among the plurality of specific performances in one of a plurality of notification modes having different degree of expectation for execution of a special game. The expectation degree differs depending on when notifying in advance the player of execution of first prescribed times of the specific performance or when notifying in advance the player of execution of second prescribed times different from the first prescribed times of the specific performance in a second game performance. The second game performance is more easily executed when determining not to execute the special game in a second game state different from a first game state than when determining not to execute the special game in the first game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and more particularly, to a gaming machine that advances a game based on a determination result as to whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to a player.

  In conventional gaming machines, the variation time (variation mode) for variably displaying a special symbol is determined based on the result of jackpot determination (determination information), and depending on the case, the number of holds, etc. On the other hand, as a game effect, When the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol variation effect according to the variation time of the special symbol, the symbol variation effect based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed mainly on display on the image display device, and this symbol variation Game performance and game entertainment are enhanced by the production (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2013-184068A

  Conventional pachinko gaming machines have been desired to be further improved in terms of playing games.

  An object of the present invention is to further enhance interest in the aspect of playing a game.

  The first invention (the gaming machine (1)) is based on the determination means (44 (44a)) for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player, and the determination result by the determination means (44). And an effect control means (70) for executing a game effect, the effect control means (70) being capable of executing a plurality of specific effects (for example, the effects shown in FIG. 20). (71b) and when the plurality of specific effects are executed by the first effect control means (71b), the second game effect is notified in advance that at least one of the plurality of specific effects is performed. (E.g., the effect shown in FIG. 35) that can execute a second effect control means (71c), and the second effect control means (71c) has a plurality of different degrees of expectation for performing the special game. The second game effect can be executed in any one of the notification modes (for example, the notification modes 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 28). At the same time, in the second game effect, a case in which the specific effect for the first predetermined number of times (for example, one or two times) is performed in advance and a second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times are performed. The expectation level is different from the case of notifying in advance that a specific effect for (for example, any of 3 to 5 times) is performed, and the second game effect is different from the first game state (for example, “probability game state”). )) By the determination means (44) in a second game state (for example, “normal game state”) different from the first game state than when the determination means (44) determines that the special game is not performed. It is characterized in that it is easier to execute when it is determined not to perform a special game.

  According to a second aspect, in the first aspect, the second game effect is determined not to be performed by the determination means (44) in the first game state (for example, “probability game state”). It is characterized by not being executed in some cases.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to notify in advance that a specific effect is executed, thereby improving the effect.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram of the control system of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a chart which shows a big hit determination table. It is a chart which shows a symbol determination table. It is a table | surface which shows the opening pattern of the special winning opening in a special game, and the game state after the end of a special game. It is a chart which shows the 2nd start mouth operation mode. It is a chart which shows a plurality of game states. (1) is a table for determining the special figure fluctuation time in the normal / latent certain gaming state, (2) is a table for determining the special figure fluctuation time in the short-time / probable variable gaming state, and (3) is a determination of various fluctuation times. It is a chart which shows a rate, respectively. It is a chart which shows various commands. (1) is a chart showing a plurality of symbol variation effects, (2) is a plurality of special game effects, and (3) is a chart showing a plurality of ending effects. It is a figure which shows a design change effect. It is a chart which shows a plurality of production modes. It is a figure which shows N lose effect and N reach lose effect of a pattern change effect. It is a figure which shows the principal part of SP reach lose / hit effect of a pattern fluctuation effect. It is a figure which shows the principal part of SP * SP reach lose / hit effect of a symbol fluctuation effect. It is a chart which shows the execution rate of various productions. (1) is a chart showing a plurality of SP reach effect modes, and (2) a plurality of SP / SP reach effect modes.

(1) is a time chart of SP reach effect including a plurality of specific effects, and (2) is a time chart of SP / SP reach effect including a plurality of specific effects. It is a graph which shows the determination rate of the production | presentation aspect of various suggestion productions (specific production). (1) is a figure which shows the display at the time of the operation request of 1st effect button SW, (2) is a figure which respectively shows the display at the time of the operation request of 2nd effect button SW. (1) is a chart showing an operation request rate of each button SW in the SP button operation effect, and (2) is a chart showing determination rates of various operation modes at the time of an operation request of the second button SW. It is a table | surface which shows the operation request rate of each button SW in SP * SP 1st button operation effect. (1) is a chart showing the operation request rate of each button SW in the SP / SP second button operation effect, and (2) is a chart showing determination rates of various operation modes at the time of an operation request of the second button SW. It is a graph which shows the ratio which determines the frequency | count of execution of the specific production for every design fluctuation production. It is a chart which shows the execution rate of the 2nd game production. It is a graph which shows the some alerting | reporting aspect, the content, and jackpot expectation degree of a 2nd game production. It is a graph which shows the determination rate of the various effect aspects of the 2nd game effect for every design fluctuation effect. It is a time chart including the first-half game effect and the second game effect of the symbol variation effect. It is a figure regarding SU production. It is a figure regarding pseudo | simulation continuous production. It is a table | surface which shows the effect point etc. which respond | correspond to the some alerting | reporting aspect of a 2nd game effect. It is a figure which shows the specific display part which displays the 2nd game effect of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a some alerting | reporting aspect. (1) is a chart showing the start / end timing of the second game effect, (2) is the last specific effect informing the execution in advance, and (2) is the chart showing the execution time of the second game effect. It is a chart which shows the execution rate in various states of the 2nd game production. It is a figure which shows the display mode of a holding | maintenance symbol. It is a chart which shows the selection rate of prefetch mode. It is a chart which shows the selection rate of a prefetch display mode. It is a figure which shows switching of the alerting | reporting aspect of a 2nd game effect. FIG. 42 is a view corresponding to FIG. 41. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the alerting | reporting aspect of the change form of a 2nd game production. FIG. 44 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 43. FIG. 44 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 43. It is a figure which shows the various effects which concern on a change form.

FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a gaming machine 1A in a state where an outer frame 10A, a game board unit 12A, and an inner frame 14A of Example 2 are opened. It is a rear view of game board unit 12A. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board unit 12A. It is (a) perspective view, (b) rear view, and (c) right side view of the assembly 2A. It is a disassembled perspective view of 2 A of assemblies. It is the left view which showed a mode that the board | substrate case 3A was assembled | attached to the base 20A. It is (a) perspective view, (b) rear view, (c) right side view of substrate case 3A. It is a disassembled perspective view of board case 3A. It is (a) rear view and (b) front view of sealing body 4A which combined outer case 45A and inner case 40A. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view in the arrow direction of a position corresponding to the line AA in FIG. 53 in the outer case 45A of the substrate case 1003 according to a modified example. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view in the arrow direction of a position corresponding to the line AA in FIG. 53 in an outer case 45A of a substrate case 1103 according to a modified example. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view in the arrow direction of a position corresponding to the line AA in FIG. 53 in the outer case 45A of the substrate case 1203 according to a modified example. It is a rear view of the substrate case 1303 which concerns on a modification. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view in the direction of arrows BB in FIG. 59 in the outer case 45A of the substrate case 1303. It is a schematic front view which shows the pachinko game machine of embodiment i. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine of embodiment i. It is a block diagram which shows schematic structure of the pachinko game machine of Embodiment i. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the switch process performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch process performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch process performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the gate switch process performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination process performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a stop performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol process performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the electric tulip process performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the special winning opening opening control process performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the game state setting process performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the status notification process performed by main CPU of the main control board of embodiment A. It is a front view of the indicator of embodiment a. It is a rear view of the display of Embodiment A. It is the schematic which shows the cross section of the indicator of Embodiment A. It is the schematic which shows a cross section in the state which decomposed | disassembled the display of Embodiment A. It is a schematic perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the indicator of Embodiment A. It is a front view of the substrate for display of embodiment A. It is a rear view of the display substrate of Embodiment A. It is a rear view of the cover member of Embodiment a. It is explanatory drawing which shows the circuit of the display of Embodiment A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the indicator of embodiment b. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the coating | coated member of embodiment b, and an identification means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a game state display. It is a front view of the indicator of embodiment b. It is a rear view of the display of embodiment b. It is the schematic which shows the cross section of the indicator of embodiment B. It is the schematic which shows a cross section in the state which decomposed | disassembled the display of embodiment b. It is a schematic perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the indicator of embodiment b. It is a front view of the display substrate of embodiment b. It is a rear view of the cover member of embodiment b. It is explanatory drawing which shows the circuit of the indicator of embodiment B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the circuit of another example of the indicator of embodiment B. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the indicator of embodiment C from the front. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the indicator of embodiment C from the back. It is explanatory drawing of the indicator of embodiment C.

  Hereinafter, modes for carrying out the invention will be described based on examples.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an opening / closing frame 2 (inner frame 2) attached to an outer frame (not shown) attached to the island structure of the game hall so as to be opened and closed. The opening / closing door 3 is mounted to be freely opened and closed.

  A window 3a is formed in the opening / closing door 3, and a transparent plate 3b is attached to the window 3a. The left end of the open / close door 3 is supported by the left end of the open / close frame 2 so as to be rotatable about the vertical axis, and a key cylinder 3c for locking the open / close door 3 to the open / close frame 2 is mounted on the right portion of the open / close door 3. Has been. A game board 4 is mounted on the opening / closing frame 2, and a game area 4 a in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the game board 4 and the transparent plate 3 b on the front side thereof, and the game area 4 a is opened and closed by the opening / closing door 3. .

  The open / close door 3 is provided with a storage tray 5 for storing game balls below the window 3a. The storage tray 5 can be operated by a player with a first effect button SW6a, a second effect button SW6b, and a cross key SW6c. And an effect operating device 6 ("SW" means a switch) having an enter button SW6d. The first and second effect buttons SW6a and 6b are both used for button operation effects, the first effect button SW6a is a normal button SW, and the second button SW6b is a special larger button than the first effect button SW6a. Button SW.

  Each of the first and second buttons SW6a and 6b has a built-in color LED, and can change between a state emitting light of a predetermined color and a state not emitting light by the color LED. Can be seen by the player. Normally, no light is emitted. Furthermore, the first and second buttons SW6a and 6b each have a built-in vibrator (vibrator), and can be changed between a vibrating state and a non-vibrating state by the vibrator. Then, the player who operates the vibrating buttons SW6a and 6b can feel the vibration. Normally, the vibration does not occur.

  When the launching handle 7 is attached to the lower right side of the storage tray 5 and the launching handle 7 is rotated, a game ball introduced from the storage tray 5 to the launch position is launched, and a plurality of games are played on the storage tray 5. When the ball is stored, a plurality of game balls are continuously fired at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. The launched game ball is guided by the guide rail 8 and introduced into the upper part of the game area 4a.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game area 4 a has a first start port 10 and a second start port device 11 having an openable second start port 11 a in addition to a number of obstacle nails (not shown). A gate 12, a grand prize opening device 13 having an open / close type big prize opening 13 a, and a plurality of general prize openings 14 are provided in the arrangement shown in the figure so that game balls can be won (entered / passed), respectively. Yes. The first starting port 10, the gate 12, and the plurality of general winning ports 14 are respectively provided with a first starting port SW10a for detecting a winning game ball, a gate SW12a, and a plurality of general winning ports SW14a.

  The second starter device 11 includes a second starter 11a, an opening / closing member 11b that opens and closes the second starter 11a, a second starter SW11c that detects a game ball won in the second starter 11a, and an opening / closing member. And a second start port SOL11d ("SOL" means a solenoid actuator) that opens and closes 11b. The second start port 11a is normally in a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize (impossible to win a prize) due to the opening / closing member 11b and the second start port SOL11d. ) Can operate in the open state.

  The big prize opening device 13 opens and closes the big prize opening 13a, the opening / closing member 13b for opening / closing the big prize opening 13a, the big winning opening SW13c for detecting a game ball won in the big prize opening 13a, and the opening / closing member 13b. And a grand prize opening SOL13d. The large winning opening 13a is normally closed by the opening / closing member 13b and the large winning opening SOL13d so that the game ball is difficult to win (cannot win), and the closed state and the game ball are easy to win (can win). Can work with the state.

  When a game ball launched into the game area 4a wins one of the winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 14, the number (number of numbers) set for each winning opening 10, 11a, 13a, 14 per winning game ball. (Ten to several dozen) game balls are paid out to the storage tray 5 as prize balls. If the game ball launched into the game area 4a does not win any of the winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 14, it is finally discharged from the lower discharge opening 9 to the outside of the gaming area 4a.

  A special game lottery is performed when a game ball wins one of the start ports 10 and 11a, and when winning in the special game lottery, a special game (a big hit game) is generated in which the big winning port 13a is opened. When the game ball passes through the gate 12, an auxiliary game lottery is performed. When the game ball is won by the auxiliary game lottery, an auxiliary game in which the second start port 11a is opened is generated.

  A center board 15 is attached to the game board 4, and the center board 15 is equipped with an image display device 16 (liquid crystal display device 16) for game effect and first and second movable game devices 17 and 18. Yes. The center accessory 15 is fitted and attached to a center opening formed in the game board 4 at the center frame 15a, and a stage 15b on which a game ball rolls is formed below the center frame 15a. . The image display device 16 is arranged so that the screen can be seen from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the inside of the center frame 15a, and a game effect is displayed on the image display device 16. Each of the first and second movable accessory devices 17 and 18 is in a position where it is retracted from the front side of the image display device 16 when not operating, and moves to a position where it projects to the front side of the image display device 16 when operating.

  A game display board 19 is provided in the lower right part of the game board 4, and this game display board 19 has a first special figure display 19a, a second special figure display 19b, a general figure display 19c, and a first special figure holding lamp. 19d, a second special figure holding lamp 19e, and a general figure holding lamp 19f.

  The first special symbol display 19a displays the first special symbol fluctuating or stopped, the first special figure reservation lamp 19d displays the first special figure reservation number, and the first special figure reservation number is less than four. 1 is added each time a game ball wins at one start port 10. When the second special symbol display 19b changes or stops the second special symbol, the second special figure holding lamp 19e displays the second special figure holding number, and the second special figure holding number is less than four. 2 Each time a game ball wins a prize at the starting port 11a, 1 is added.

  In the state where both the first and second special symbols are stopped and displayed, when the first special symbol holding number is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and the special game lottery is performed with the subsequent stopped symbols. Is displayed, or when the second special figure holding number is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted, the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, and the special game lottery result is displayed in the subsequent stop symbol.

  When the normal symbol is changed or stopped on the general-purpose display 19c, the number of general-purpose reservations is displayed on the general-purpose holding lamp 19f. Is added. In the state where the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, when the number of held general symbols is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted, the normal symbol starts to fluctuate, and the result of the auxiliary game lottery is displayed in the subsequent stop symbol.

Next, a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 3, the control device 30 includes a game control board 31, a payout control board 32, an effect control board 33, an image control board 34, and a lamp control board 35. The presentation control board 33 further includes an RTC (“RTC” means a real time clock).

  The computer of the game control board 31 receives signals from the first start opening SW10a, the second start opening SW11c, the gate SW12a, the big winning opening SW13c, the plurality of general winning openings SW14a, and the control information from the payout control board 32, The second start opening SOL11d, the special winning opening SOL13d, the symbol displays 19a to 19c, and the symbol holding lamps 19d to 19f are controlled, and control information (command) is output to the payout control board 32 and the effect control board 33.

  The computer of the payout control board 32 receives the control information from the game control board 31 and the signals from the payout ball detection SW 36b, the ball presence detection SW 36c, and the full tank detection SW 36d, and controls the payout motor 36a. Output control information. The computer of the production control board 33 receives the control information from the game control board 31, the image control board 34, the lamp control board 35, and the signal from the production operation device 6 (SW 6a, 6b, 6c, 6d), and produces the production operation device. 6 (LEDs and vibrators of the first and second buttons SW6a and 6b) are controlled, and control information is output to the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35.

  The computer of the image control board 34 receives the control information from the effect control board 33, controls the game display image display device 16 and the speaker 37, and outputs the control information to the effect control board 33. The computer of the lamp control board 35 receives control information from the effect control board 33 and signals from the first and second movable accessory devices 17 and 18 (origin SW), and a frame lamp 38a for game effects, a panel lamp 38b, the first and second movable accessory devices 17 and 18 (electric motors) are controlled, and the control information is output to the effect control board 33. The computer of the lamp control board 35 may control the presentation operation device 6 (LED and vibrator).

  As shown in FIG. 4, each means 40-47, 50-57, 60, 65, 66 of illustration is comprised mainly by the computer of the game control board 31 (main control part). The special figure counter means 40 sequentially updates the jackpot determination value, the symbol determination value, the reach determination value, and the fluctuation pattern determination value every minute time within the set range.

  The special figure acquisition means 41 is a jackpot updated by the special figure counter means 40 when the special figure starting condition is satisfied and the special figure starting condition is established when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 when the first special figure holding number is less than 4. When the determination value, the symbol determination value, the reach determination value, and the variation pattern determination value are acquired as a set of first special figure determination information and the second special figure holding number is less than 4, the game ball is set to the second start port. When winning a prize 11a, a special figure starting condition is established, and the jackpot determination value, the symbol determination value, the reach determination value, and the variation pattern determination value updated by the special figure counter means 40 are used as a set of second special figure determination information. get.

  The special figure holding storage means 42 has up to four pieces of first and second special figure determination information acquired by the special figure acquisition means 41 and not used for the determination by the big hit determination means 44a of the special figure determination means 44, that is, the special figure determination means 44. A total of eight figure determination information can be stored (suspended), and the number of first special figure determination information stored in the special figure storage means 42 becomes the first special figure reservation number, and the special figure reservation storage means 42. The number of second special figure determination information stored in the second special figure reservation number.

  The special figure reservation storing means 43 uses the special figure determination information stored in the special figure reservation storage means 42 for the determination by the big hit determination means 44a one by one every time the variation of the special symbol is started. Erase (hold digestion) from. At this time, when a plurality of special figure determination information is stored in the special figure hold storage means 42, the order in which the plurality of special figure determination information is stored in the special figure hold storage means 42 (that is, the special figure acquisition means 41). In the order acquired by the above), but when both the first and second special figure determination information are stored in the special figure holding storage means 42, the second special figure determination information is designated as the first special figure. Digest prior to decision information.

  In the special figure determination means 44, the big hit determination means 44a is based on the special figure determination information stored in the special figure hold storage means 42, specifically, the special figure determination information digested by the special figure hold digest means 43, It is determined whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be performed, and if it is determined that the special game is to be performed, the symbol determination means 44b determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13a in the special game and the gaming state after the special game ends. judge.

  Specifically, first, the jackpot determination means 44a determines whether or not to play a special game based on the jackpot determination value of the special figure determination information. In this case, as shown in FIG. 5, determination is made using either a low probability table or a high accuracy table as the big hit determination table. Specifically, in the low-accuracy table, if the big hit judgment value matches any of the big hit specific values (3,247...) At a ratio of about 1/200, it is determined that the special game is performed, and in the high accuracy table, the big hit determination is made. When the value matches one of the big hit specific values (3, 7,...) At a rate of about 10/200, it is determined that a special game is to be performed.

  When it is determined that the big hit determination means 44a performs the special game, the symbol determination means 44b has a plurality of big hit symbols (hit symbols A to F shown in FIG. 6) based on the symbol determination value of the special symbol determination information. If any one of them is selected and the special figure determination information is the first special figure determination information, the selection rate specified by the first symbol selection table shown in FIG. In this case, symbols are selected at a selection rate defined by the second symbol selection table shown in FIG. If it is determined not to play a special game, a lost symbol is selected.

  In the special figure determination means 44, the fluctuation mode determination means 44c is provided with the special figure determination information (specifically, the determination result by the jackpot determination means 44a and the symbol determination means 44b (selected determination symbols; jackpot symbols A to F, Special figure variation mode (special figure fluctuation time) that displays special symbols variably based on the current game state, the number of special figure reservations, etc. ) Is determined (determined). Specific processing for determining the special figure variation mode will be described later.

  The special figure display control means 45 starts the variable display of the first special symbol when the first special figure determination information is digested by the special figure reservation digesting means 43, and 2 When the special figure determination information is digested, the second special symbol variation display is started, and the special symbol variation display is performed in the special symbol variation mode determined by the variation mode determination means 44c. After the special symbol variation time and the special symbol defined in the aspect are displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol variation time and the special symbol determination unit 44b are stopped and displayed with the determination symbols indicating the determination results.

  That is, when it is determined by the big hit determination means 44a that a special game is to be performed, any of the big hit symbols A to F is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol, and when it is determined that no special game is to be performed, the lose symbol is used as a determination symbol. Stop display.

  When the special game execution means 46 determines that the special game is to be performed by the big hit determination means 44a, the special figure display control means 45 uses the determination symbol indicating the determination result (the big hit symbol selected by the symbol determination means 44b). After the stop display, a special game advantageous to the player who opens the special winning opening 13a is performed with an opening pattern corresponding to the determination symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13a in the special game is set as shown, for example. In the 16R (round) long-term opening, the grand prize opening 13a is opened and closed over 16R, and each R starts after opening the big prize opening 13a, and then, for example, 10 game balls are won in the big prize opening 13a. Alternatively, for example, when an R end condition of 30 seconds elapses, the special winning opening 13a is closed and the process ends. In the 8R long-term opening, the special winning opening 13a is opened and closed over 8R, and after each R starts, the R finishes when the same R end condition as in the 16R long-term opening is satisfied.

  The probability setting means 47 uses a low probability (about 1/200) or a high probability table shown in FIG. 5 to determine the big hit probability determined to perform the special game by the big hit determination means 44a using the low probability table shown in FIG. Use to set high probability (about 10/200).

  On the other hand, the normal counter 50 updates the hit determination value sequentially every minute time. When the number of reserved figures is less than 4, the figure acquisition means 51 establishes a figure start condition when the game ball passes through the gate 12, and sets the hit determination value updated by the figure counter means 50 as 1 Acquired as general-purpose determination information for a set. The common figure hold storage means 52 can store (hold) up to four pieces of common figure determination information acquired by the general figure acquisition means 51 and not subjected to the determination by the general figure determination means 54. The number of the general map determination information stored in the number becomes the general map hold number.

  The universal figure reservation means 53 uses the universal figure determination information stored in the universal figure reservation storage means 52 for the determination by the universal figure determination means 54 one by one every time the change of the normal symbol is started. Delete from 52 (hold digestion). At this time, when a plurality of common map determination information is stored in the general map hold storage means 52, the order in which the plurality of general map determination information is stored in the general map hold storage means 52 (that is, the general map acquisition means 51). Digest in the order obtained).

  The common figure determination means 54 determines whether or not to perform an auxiliary game based on the common figure determination information stored in the general figure hold storage means 52, more specifically, based on the common figure determination information digested by the general figure hold digest means 53. Determine. Based on the determination result by the general map determination unit 54, the general map display control unit 55 starts the normal symbol variation display when the general map determination information is digested by the general map hold digest unit 53. Is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed with a determination symbol indicating the determination result. If it is determined that the auxiliary game is to be played by the general symbol determination means 54, the auxiliary game winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and if it is determined that the auxiliary game is not to be performed, the lose symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When it is determined that the auxiliary game execution means 56 performs the auxiliary game, the general symbol display control means 55 stops and displays the determination symbol (auxiliary game winning symbol) indicating the determination result. Then, an auxiliary game for opening the second start port 11a is performed. As shown in FIG. 8, the operation mode setting means 57 sets a low operation mode in which the second start port 11 a is hardly operated in the open state or a high operation mode in which the second start port 11 a is easily operated in the open state as the second start port operation mode. .

  Specifically, in the low operation mode, the hit probability determined to perform the auxiliary game by the normal figure determination means 54 is 1/10, and the normal figure change time during which the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal figure display control means 55 is 12 Second, the second start port opening pattern for opening the second start port 11a in the auxiliary game by the auxiliary game execution means 56 is set to 0.1 second × 1 time. The time is set to 0.5 seconds, and the second opening opening pattern is set to 2.0 seconds x 3 times.

  The gaming state control means 60 includes a plurality of gaming states (“normal gaming state” (low-probability / non-short-time state), “short-time gaming state” (low-probability / short-time state), “latent-probable gaming state” ( High accuracy / non-time short state) or “Probability change game state” (high accuracy / short time state)) is set, and the game is controlled in the game state. It should be noted that when the power is turned on, the gaming state set at the previous power-off is set continuously, and when the so-called RAM clear is executed at the time of power-on, the “normal gaming state” is set.

  As shown in FIG. 9, a low probability is set by the probability setting means 47 in the “normal gaming state” and the “short-time gaming state”, and a high probability is set by the probability setting means 47 in the “latent gaming state” and “probability changing gaming state”. Is set. In the “normal game state” and the “latent probability game state”, the low operation mode is set by the operation mode setting means 57, and in the “time-short game state” and “probability game state”, the high operation mode is set by the operation mode setting means 57. Is set. Basically, the “short-time gaming state” is more than the “normal gaming state”, the “latent gaming state” is more than the “short-time gaming state”, and the “latent gaming state” is “ The “probable game state” is more advantageous to the player.

  When the special game is executed by the special game executing means 46, the game state control means 60 sets the game state after the special game is finished as shown in FIG. When either of the big hit symbols A and B is stopped and the so-called “probability big hit” is reached, “probable change gaming state” is set after the special game is finished, and then the special figure indicators 19a and 19b When the number of special symbol fluctuations of the symbol reaches 10,000, the game is shifted to the “normal game state”. When the big hit symbol C is stopped and the so-called “latent big hit” is reached, the “latent promising game state” is set after the special game ends, and after that, when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 10,000 times, “Game state”.

  When either of the big hit symbols D and E is stopped and the so-called “short-time big hit” is reached, after the special game is finished, the “short-time game state” is set, and then when the special figure change count reaches 50 times , Transition to the “normal gaming state”. When the big hit symbol F is stopped and displayed so-called “normal big hit”, the “normal game state” is set after the special game ends.

  A specific process of determining the special figure fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation aspect) by the fluctuation aspect determination means 44c will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (1), in the “normal game state” and the “latent probability game state”, it is determined that the special game is not performed by the big hit determination unit 44a, and the loss symbol is selected by the symbol determination unit 44b. In this case, first, based on the reach determination value of the special figure determination information, the “first type variation time” for notifying “losing” without “reach” (reach state) or “reach” It is then determined whether the “second type variation time” for notifying “losing” is set.

  In the case of “first type variation time”, when the special figure determination information is the first special figure determination information (that is, when the first special symbol is variably displayed), the first special figure hold number Based on (the number of the first special figure hold immediately before the start of the change of the special symbol), for example, one of 9 seconds, 7 seconds, 5 seconds, 3 seconds shown in the figure is determined as the “first type change time” Although not shown in the figure, when the special figure determination information is the second special figure determination information (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed), the first and second special figure hold numbers are set. Regardless, for example, a relatively short 3 seconds is determined. In the case of “second type variation time”, based on the variation pattern determination value of the special figure determination information, as the “second type variation time”, for example, 13 seconds, 15 seconds,. , 25 seconds ..., 50 seconds.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special game is to be performed by the big hit determining means 44a and the big hit symbol (any one of the big hit symbols A to F) is selected by the symbol determining means 44b, the type of the selected symbol and the special symbol Based on the fluctuation pattern judgment value of the figure judgment information, “reach” and “big hit” for “third type fluctuation time”, for example, 14 seconds, 16 seconds,..., 30 seconds, 35 seconds shown in the figure ..., determine one of 60 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (2), in the “short-time gaming state” and “probability changing gaming state”, it is determined that the special game is not performed by the big hit determining means 44a, and the lost symbol is selected by the symbol determining means 44b. In this case, as in the “normal gaming state” and “latent probability gaming state”, first, based on the reach determination value of the special figure determination information, the “first type variation time” is set, or “ It is determined whether or not “two kinds of variation time” is set.

  In the case of “first type variation time”, when the special figure determination information is the second special figure determination information (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed), the second special figure hold number Based on (the second special figure hold number immediately before the start of the change of the special symbol), as the “first type change time”, for example, either 12 seconds or 2 seconds shown (depending on the special figure hold number) The special figure variation time is determined and is not shown, but when the special figure determination information is the first special figure determination information (that is, when the first special symbol is variably displayed), Regardless of the number of second special figure hold, for example, a relatively long 13 seconds is determined. When the “second type variation time” is set, the “second type variation time” is determined based on the variation pattern determination value of the special figure determination information in the same manner as in the “normal game state” and the “latent probability game state”. For example, any one of 13 seconds, 15 seconds,..., 20 seconds, 25 seconds,.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that a special game is to be performed by the big hit determination means 44a and the big hit symbol is selected by the symbol determination means 44b, the selection is made in the same manner as in the “normal game state” and “latent probability game state”. Based on the pattern type and the variation pattern judgment value of the special figure judgment information, for example, as shown in the figure, 14 seconds, 16 seconds ..., 30 seconds, 35 seconds ... , Determine one of 60 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (3), at the time of a loss (when it is determined that the special game is not performed by the big hit determining means 44a) and at the time of a big hit (when it is determined that the special game is performed by the big hit determining means 44a) Any of the above-mentioned “first type variation time”, “second type variation time”, and “third type variation time” is determined, for example, at the illustrated determination rate.

  In the special figure determination means 44, the prior determination means 44d is based on special figure determination information stored in the special figure hold storage means 42 (that is, special figure determination information that is later digested by the special figure hold digest means 43). Specifically, when the special figure determination information is acquired by the special figure acquisition means 41, the big hit determination means 44a, the symbol determination means 44b, and the variation mode determination means 44c perform the determination on the special figure determination information. Before being determined, it is possible to make a determination equivalent to the determination (that is, selection of any one of the jackpot symbols A to F and the lost symbol, determination of the special symbol variation mode (special symbol variation time)) in advance.

  The prior determination means 44d basically performs preliminary determination on each acquired special figure determination information based on the gaming state at the time of acquisition, but when the special figure determination information is acquired, Based on the result of prior determination based on the special figure determination information acquired before the special figure determination information, the gaming state at the time of acquisition of the special figure determination information is different from the gaming state at the time of digestion of the special figure determination information. If it turns out, you may make it perform prior determination based on the game state at the time of the digestion.

  The command generation means 65 generates commands (various commands shown in FIG. 11) according to the progress of the game, and the command transmission means 66 transmits the commands generated by the command generation means 65 to the effect control board 33.

  The special figure hold increase command is generated and transmitted when the special figure determination information is acquired / stored, and the special figure hold increase command includes information indicating the determination pattern and the special figure change time determined by the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit 44d. It is included. The special figure change start command is generated and transmitted when the special symbol change is started, and the special figure change stop command is generated and transmitted when the special symbol change is stopped. The special figure change start command includes the jackpot determining means 44a and the symbol determining means. 44b, information indicating the determination symbol determined by the determination by the variation mode determination unit 44c and the special symbol variation time, and information indicating the determination symbol determined by the determination are included in the special symbol variation stop command, respectively. include.

  The opening command is generated and transmitted at the start of the special game, and the ending command is generated and transmitted at the end of the final R of the special game. The opening command is a special game that is started based on the determination pattern determined by the determination. Information indicating the type of game (open pattern of the special winning opening 13a), and the ending command includes information indicating the game state set after the end of the special game based on the determination pattern determined in the determination, respectively. include.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the respective means 67 and 70 to 74 shown in the figure are constituted by a computer of the effect control board 33, the image control board 34, and the lamp control board 35 (effect control unit). The command receiving unit 67 receives a command transmitted from the computer of the game control board 31 by the command transmitting unit 66.

  The effect control means 70 has a change effect control means 71, a hold effect control means 72, a special game effect control means 73, and a prefetch effect control means 74, and based on the command received by the command receiving means 67, that is, the main In addition, based on the determination results by the special figure determination means 44 (big hit determination means 44a, symbol determination means 44b, variation mode determination means 44c, advance determination means 44d), the effect means 80 (image display device 16, movable accessory device 17, 18, the speaker 37 and the lamps 38a and 38b) are controlled to cause the effecting means 80 to perform a game effect.

  The special effect display control means 45 displays the special symbol in a variable manner by the special figure display control means 45 based on the image (moving image) displayed on the image display device 16 and the sound output from the speaker 37 in accordance with the image. The symbol variation based on the determination result by the jackpot determination means 44a and the symbol determination means 44b according to the special symbol variation display, that is, based on the special symbol variation start command received at the start of the variation of the special symbol. The symbol variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation time determined by the variation mode determination means 44c (the special symbol is variably displayed) is a plurality of symbol variation effects (designs) shown in FIG. Select one of the fluctuating effects 1, 2, 3,.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the symbol variation effect, basically, (1) after three groups of effect symbol sequences 16a start to fluctuate, (2) the effect symbol “X” on the left side varies. (3) The effect design “Y” on the right side is variably stopped, (4) The effect design “Z” in the center is displayed to variably stop, and these three stop design sequences “XZY” are confirmed and displayed. Thus, a combination display mode showing the determination results by the big hit determination means 44a and the symbol determination means 44b is obtained.

  In the variation effect control means 71, the effect mode setting means 71a is provided with a plurality of effect modes (“normal mode”, “latency mode”, “time reduction mode”, “probability change mode” “ Any one of “probability change suggestion mode”, “latent probability suggestion mode”, and “prefetching mode”) is set, and the variation effect control means 71 causes the symbol change effect to be performed in the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means 71a. The effect mode setting means 71a is basically “normal mode” in the “normal gaming state”, “normal mode” or “latent probability mode” in the “latent probability gaming state”, and “time-short gaming state”. In some cases, the “time reduction mode” is set, and in the “probability changing gaming state”, the “probability changing mode” is set.

  However, depending on the case, after the “probable big hit” and “time and big jackpot” are finished, the special figure variation number is the first set number of times (for example, 1 to 50 times) when the “short time gaming state” or “probable variation gaming state” Until it exceeds (any number of times), it sets the “probability change suggestion mode”, suggests the possibility of being “probability change game state”, and after the completion of “latent probability big hit” and “normal big hit”, In the “normal gaming state” or “latent probability gaming state”, the “latency suggestion mode” until the number of special figure fluctuations exceeds the second set number of times (for example, any number of 1 to 100 times). To indicate the possibility of being in the “latent gaming state”.

  In addition, the special symbol variation display based on the special figure determination information that is the target is ended for the special figure determination information that is the target of the pre-reading effect on the basis of the determination result by the prior determination unit 44d. By doing this, while the special symbol is variably displayed several times (for example, any one of 1 to 4 times), it is possible to set the “look-ahead mode” and expect it to be “big hit” it can. Note that the symbol variation effect in each effect mode is a background image that is the background of the effect symbol displayed on the image display device 16 or the display mode of the effect symbol (effect) in comparison with the symbol variation effect in the other effect modes. The design, size, variation mode, etc.) are different.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (1), each of the symbol variation effects 1, 2, 3... N has an expected degree of special game play; The big hit expectation is classified into either “second type variation effect” or “third type variation effect”, which is higher than “first type variation effect”, and the special figure variation time is shown in FIG. If it is “time”, “first type variation effect” is performed, and if it is “second type variation time” shown in FIG. 10, “second type variation effect” is performed, and “third type variation effect” is shown in FIG. If it is “species variation time”, “third type variation effect” is performed.

  Specifically, in the symbol variation effect, as shown in FIG. 15, (1) after the three effect symbol sequences 16a start to fluctuate, (2) First, the effect symbol “7” on the left side changes and stops ( 3) Next, when the production pattern “1” on the right side stops variably, the production designs “7” and “1” become “non-reach” (non-reach state), and (4) next, the production in the center When the symbol “6” stops changing and the loss stop symbol string “761” is fixedly displayed, the determination result “losing” is notified.

  (2) After the production symbol “7” on the left side stops variably, (5) When the production symbol “7” on the right side stops variably, the production symbols “7” and “7” become “reach” and become “reach” When the “reach effect” is started and the “N reach effect” that does not shift to the “SP effect” is performed, then the (6) center effect symbol “6” stops variably and becomes “767” When the lost stop symbol sequence is confirmed and displayed, the determination result of “lost” is notified.

  Note that the series of effects from the start of fluctuation of the three sets of effect symbol sequence 16a in FIG. 15 (1) to FIG. 15 (4) is “N loss effect” which is “first type fluctuation effect”. A series of productions up to 15 (6) is “N reach reach production” which is “second type variation production”. “N” means normal.

  Further, after “reach” is started and “reach production” is started as shown in FIG. 15 (5), as shown in FIG. 16, in the “reach production”, (1) production symbols “7” “7” ”Is moved to the corner of the screen and displayed in a reduced size. (2)“ SP production ”(reach development production; story production in which a friend and enemy battle, etc.) is performed, When the “SP reach production” is finished, (3) when the central production symbol “6” stops variably and the loss stop symbol string “767” is fixedly displayed, the determination result of “lost” is notified. (4) When the center effect symbol “7” stops variably and the hit stop symbol string “777” is fixedly displayed, the determination result of “big hit” is notified.

  Note that the series of effects from the start of the change of the three sets of effect symbol sequence 16a in FIG. 15 (1) to FIG. 16 (3) is the “SP Reach Loss Effect” which is the “second type change effect”. A series of productions up to 16 (4) is “per-SP reach production” which is “third type variation production”. Note that “SP” means a special, and “SP reach production” is basically a production with a higher degree of jackpot expectation than “N reach production”.

  In addition, after reaching “reach” as shown in FIG. 15 (5) and starting “reach effect”, as shown in FIG. 17, in the “reach effect”, first, as in FIG. 16, (1 ) Production symbols “7” and “7” move to the screen corner side and are reduced and displayed. (2) When “SP reach production” is performed, after that, “3 SP After the symbol “6” fluctuates and stops, it is restarted. (4) The effect symbols “7” and “7” move to the screen corner side and are reduced and displayed. (5) “SP / SP” is “SP effect” Reach production "is performed.

  Alternatively, after “reach” is started as shown in FIG. 15 (5) and “reach production” is started, as shown in FIG. 17, “SP reach production” is not performed, and (4) production symbol “ “7” and “7” move to the screen corner side and are reduced and displayed (5) “SP / SP reach production” which is “SP production”. When the “SP / SP reach production” is finished, (6) the central production symbol “6” stops variably, and when the loss stop symbol string “767” is fixedly displayed, the determination of “lost” is made. The result is notified, and (7) When the center effect symbol “7” is variably stopped and the hit stop symbol string “777” is fixedly displayed, the determination result of “big hit” is notified.

  Note that the series of effects from the start of variation of the three sets of effect symbol sequence 16a in FIG. 15 (1) to FIG. 17 (6) is “SP / SP reach lose effect” which is the “second type variation effect”. A series of effects up to FIG. 17 (7) is “acts per SP / SP reach” which is a “third type variation effect”. Note that the “SP / SP reach production” is basically a production with a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than the “SP reach production”.

  As shown in FIG. 18, at the time of a loss and a big hit, the above-mentioned “N loss production” “N reach production” (“N reach loss production”) “SP reach production” (“SP reach loss production” “SP reach production”) Any one of “SP / SP reach production” (“SP / SP reach lose production” “SP / SP reach production”) is executed at the execution rate shown in the figure, for example.

  Note that, from the execution rate shown in FIG. 18, when the jackpot probability is low; 1/200 (for example, “normal game state”), “SP effect” (“SP reach effect” “SP / SP reach effect”) ; 5% at the time of losing, 100% at the time of the big hit), the expected degree of big hit is [1/200 × 100/100; the execution rate of the “SP production” at the big hit] ÷ [1/200 × 100/100 + 199/200 × 5/100; the overall “SP production rate” is about 9.1% from “SP production rate” × 100, and the big hit expectation when “SP / SP reach production” is executed is [1 / 200 × 80/100; execution rate of “SP / SP reach production” at big hit] ÷ [1/200 × 80/100 + 199/200 × 2/100; execution rate of “SP / SP reach production”] × From 100 to about 17%.

  Here, the symbol variation effect including at least one of the “SP reach effect” and the “SP / SP reach effect” corresponds to the first game effect, and the variation effect control unit 71 uses the first variation effect control unit 71a (first step). 1 effect control means 71a) can execute the first game effect, and execute a plurality of specific effects in the first game effect ("SP reach effect" and "SP / SP reach effect"). Is possible.

  “SP reach production” is a plurality of SP reach production modes (SP reach production modes 1, 2, 3,..., M... The SP / SP reach production mode is executed in one SP reach production mode corresponding to the special figure variation time. The SP / SP reach production mode has different SP / SP reach production modes (SP / SP shown in FIG. 19 (2)). Among the reach effect modes 1, 2, 3,..., N...), The SP / SP reach effect mode corresponding to the special figure variation time is executed.

  And in each SP reach production mode of "SP reach production", a plurality of specific productions are performed, and at least a part of the number and type of the specific productions is performed in each other SP reach production mode. Unlike the number and type of effects, etc., and in each SP / SP reach effect mode of “SP / SP reach effect”, a plurality of specific effects are performed, and the number, type, etc. of the specific effects are at least partly However, it differs from the number and type of specific effects performed in each of the other SP / SP reach effects modes, and further differs from the number and type of specific effects performed in each SP reach effect mode.

  A plurality of specific effects performed in each SP reach effect mode of “SP reach effect” or each SP / SP reach effect mode of “SP / SP reach effect” are executed at different timings. One or a plurality of suggestion effects that suggest the determination result by the big hit determination means 44a (design determination means 44b) is included.

  For example, in the “SP reach effect” shown in FIG. 20 (1), a maximum of three (3 times) specific effects; “SP start effect”, “SP continuous branch effect”, “SP button operation effect” (one of them ( “SP button operation effect”), which is a suggestion effect), is performed sequentially. “SP start effect” and “SP continuous branch effect” are mainly performed using the image display device 16, and “SP button operation effect” is mainly performed using the effect operation device 6 and the image display device 16.

  The “SP start effect” is an effect indicating the start of the “SP reach effect”, and for example, a title corresponding to the SP reach effect mode of the “SP reach effect” is displayed. The “SP continuous branch effect” is an effect indicating whether the “SP reach effect” ends or continues here, and the “SP continuous branch effect” in FIG. ", That is, an effect indicating that the" SP reach effect "is being executed in an SP reach effect mode with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot. In addition, when the “SP continuous branch effect” indicating that the “SP reach effect” is ended, the “SP reach effect” is ended, and “losing” is determined.

  Further, for example, in the “SP / SP reach effect” shown in FIG. 20 (2) that does not go through or passes through the “SP / SP reach effect”, a maximum of five (5 times) specific effects; “SP / SP early effect” “SP / SP first button operation effect” “SP / SP continuous branch effect” “SP / SP second button operation effect” “SP / SP end effect” (of which 4 (four times) are suggested effects “SP -SP early stage effect "," SP / SP first button operation effect "," SP / SP second button operation effect "," SP / SP end effect ").

  The “SP / SP continuous branch effect” is mainly performed using the image display device 16, and the “SP / SP first button operation effect” and the “SP / SP second button operation effect” are mainly the effect operation device 6. The “SP / SP early stage effect” is mainly performed using the image display device 16 and the first movable accessory device 17, and the “SP / SP end effect” is the main effect. The image display device 16 and the second movable accessory device 18 are used.

  The “SP / SP continuous branch effect” is, for example, an effect indicating whether the “SP / SP reach effect” ends or continues here, and the “SP / SP continuous branch effect” in FIG. 20 (2). Is an effect indicating that the “SP / SP reach production” is being executed in an SP / SP reach production mode in which the SP / SP reach production mode is relatively high. Note that when the “SP / SP reach branch effect” indicating that the “SP / SP reach effect” is ended, the “SP / SP reach effect” is ended, and “losing” is determined.

  “SP button operation effect”, which is the suggestion effect of “SP reach effect”, “SP / SP early effect”, “SP / SP first button operation effect”, “SP / SP”, which is the suggestion effect of “SP / SP reach effect” The “second button operation effect” and “SP / SP end effect” will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (1), regarding the “SP button operation effect”, it is determined whether to execute in the effect mode of yellow, green, or red at a different ratio shown in the figure at the time of the loss and the big hit, The big hit expectation degree increases in the order of the production mode: yellow → green → red.

  In the “SP button operation effect”, first, an SP operation effective period is set. During the SP operation effective period, one of the first and second effect buttons SW6a and 6b is requested and any of the operations is performed. If performed, or if any of the operations is not performed, the SP cut-in effect is executed in an effect mode mainly based on the determined color at the end of the SP operation effective period. In some cases, even if any operation of the first and second effect buttons SW6a, 6b not requiring operation is performed during the SP operation effective period, the SP cut-in effect is executed at the time of the operation. You may do it.

  In the SP operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 22 (1), when requesting the operation of the first effect button SW6a, the image display device 16 is provided with a gauge indicating the SP operation effective period and the remaining period, An image of the first effect button SW6a and an arrow or a character ("press") that prompts the operation of the first effect button SW6a are displayed, and an operation of the second effect button SW6b is requested as shown in FIG. In this case, a gauge indicating the SP operation effective period and the remaining period, an image of the second effect button SW6b, and an arrow or a character for prompting the operation of the second effect button SW6b ("press") are displayed on the image display device 16. Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (1), in the “SP button operation effect”, which operation of the first and second effect buttons SW6a and 6b is requested depends on the ratio shown in FIG. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 23 (2), in the “SP button operation effect”, when the operation of the second effect button SW6b is requested, the operation mode of the second effect button SW6b is 2 Whether the effect button SW6b has no light emission + no vibration, blue light emission + no vibration, blue light emission + with vibration, red light emission + with vibration, or rainbow color light emission + with vibration However, it is determined at a ratio shown in the figure different between the time of loss and the time of big hit.

  When the second effect button SW6b emits light, in the SP operation effective period, a color (any one of blue, red, and rainbow) determined from the start of the period to the operation of the second effect button SW6b or the end of the period. When the second effect button SW6b vibrates and the second effect button SW6b vibrates, during the SP operation effective period, from the start of the period to the operation of the second effect button SW6b or the end of the period, or the operation of the second effect button SW6b Vibrate only occasionally.

  When the “SP button operation effect” is executed, from the ratio shown in FIG. 23 (1), the big hit expectation is requested to operate the second effect button SW6b more than when the operation of the first effect button SW6a is requested. When the operation of the second effect button SW6b is requested, the big hit expectation degree is the operation mode; no light emission + no vibration → blue light emission + vibration from the ratio shown in FIG. 23 (2). None → Blue light emission + with vibration → Red light emission + with vibration → Rainbow light emission + with vibration.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (2), with respect to “SP / SP early stage production”, the first movable accessory non-actuated + blue effect, the first movable accessory non-actuated at different ratios in the case of loss and the big hit. It is determined in which mode of operation + red effect, first movable combination operation + red effect, first movable combination operation + golden effect, and the jackpot expectation is the production mode; first movable combination Non-operating + blue effect → first movable accessory inactive + red effect → first movable accessory activated + red effect → first movable accessory activated + gold effect.

  Note that the first movable accessory non-operation means that the first movable accessory device 17 does not operate, and the first movable accessory operation means that the first movable accessory device 17 operates. The effect means an effect based on a color tone displayed on the image display device 16.

  As an effect mode of the “SP / SP early stage effect”, instead of the first movable accessory non-operation + blue effect and the first movable accessory non-operation + red effect, the first movable accessory operation (that is, the first effect) The movable accessory actuating device 17 operates, but no effect is performed). The performance execution rate in the operation of the eleventh movable combination is the sum of the performance execution rate in the first movable combination non-operation + blue effect and the performance execution rate in the first movable combination non-operation + red effect ( Loss: 60%, jackpot: 30%).

  As shown in FIG. 21 (3), the “SP / SP first button operation effect” is a green, red, or rainbow (rainbow) effect at a different ratio between the lost time and the big hit time. Whether or not to execute is determined, the expected degree of jackpot increases in the order of the production mode: green → red → rainbow.

  In the “SP / SP first button operation effect”, first, the SP / SP first operation effective period is set, and in the SP / SP first operation effective period, one of the first and second effect buttons SW6a, 6b is set. When an operation is requested and any of the operations is performed, the determined color is displayed at the time of the operation, or when any of the operations is not performed, at the end of the SP / SP first operation valid period. The SP / SP first cut-in effect is executed in the effect mode as the main subject. In some cases, even if any operation of the first and second effect buttons SW6a, 6b not requiring operation is performed during the SP / SP first operation valid period, One cut-in effect may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the “SP / SP first button operation effect”, which operation of the first and second effect buttons SW6a and 6b is requested is determined at the ratio shown in the figure, that is, when the game is lost. Even at the big hit, the operation of the first effect button SW6a is required at a rate of 100%.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (4), the “SP / SP second button operation effect” is executed in the green, red, or rainbow effect mode with different ratios for the lost time and the big hit time. Is determined, and the degree of expectation of jackpot increases in the order of the production mode: green → red → rainbow.

  In the “SP / SP second button operation effect”, first, the SP / SP second operation effective period is set. During the SP / SP second operation effective period, any one of the first and second effect buttons SW6a and 6b is set. When an operation is requested and any one of the operations is performed, the determined color is displayed at the time of the operation, or when any of the operations is not performed, at the end of the SP / SP second operation valid period. The SP / SP second cut-in effect is executed in the main effect mode. In some cases, even if any operation of the first and second effect buttons SW6a, 6b not requiring operation is performed during the SP / SP second operation valid period, Two cut-in effects may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (1), in the “SP / SP second button operation effect”, which operation of the first and second effect buttons SW6a and 6b is requested depends on whether it is lost or a big hit. If the operation of the second effect button SW6b is requested in the “SP / SP second button operation effect” as shown in FIG. 25 (2), the second effect is determined. As the operation mode of the button SW6b, the second effect button SW6b is set to have no light emission + vibration, blue light emission + no vibration, blue light emission + vibration, red light emission + vibration, rainbow Whether the color emission and the vibration are present is determined at different ratios in the figure when the loss occurs and when the big hit occurs.

  When the “SP / SP second button operation effect” is executed, from the ratio shown in FIG. 25 (1), the big hit expectation is the second effect button SW6b than when the operation of the first effect button SW6a is requested. When the operation of the second effect button SW6b is requested, from the ratio shown in FIG. 25 (2), the big hit expectation is the operation mode; no light emission + no vibration → Blue light emission + no vibration → blue light emission + with vibration → red light emission + with vibration → rainbow light emission + with vibration.

  In the “SP / SP first button operation effect” / “SP / SP second button operation effect”, as in the case of “SP button operation effect”, the SP / SP first operation valid period / SP / SP second When the operation of the first effect button SW6a is requested during the operation valid period, the display shown in FIG. 22 (1) is performed on the image display device 16, and when the operation of the second effect button SW6b is requested. The display shown in FIG. 22B is performed on the image display device 16.

  Also, in the “SP / SP second button operation effect”, as in the case of the “SP button operation effect”, when the second effect button SW6b emits light, the SP / SP second operation effective period is at the start of the period. When the second effect button SW6b is operated until the end of the period or when the second effect button SW6b vibrates and the second effect button SW6b vibrates, the SP / SP second operation valid period starts from the start of the period. It vibrates only when the second effect button SW6b is operated, until the end of the period, or only when the second effect button SW6b is operated.

  It should be noted that the operation mode when the operation of the second button SW6b is requested in the “SP button operation effect” shown in FIG. 23 (2), and the “SP / SP second button operation effect” shown in FIG. 25 (2). Regarding the operation mode at the time of requesting the operation of the two button SW6b, when the second button SW6b emits light, the light emission start timing is changed, and when the second button SW6b vibrates, the vibration start timing is changed. Alternatively, the big hit expectation may be made different depending on the light emission start timing and the vibration start timing.

  For example, in the “SP button operation effect” shown in FIG. 23 (2), the ratio of the operation mode of the second button SW6b to red light emission + vibration (loss: 10%, big hit: 40%) The overall ratio is not related to the vibration start timing of SW6b. As shown in the chart on the right side of FIG. 23 (2), the vibration start timing of the second button SW6b in this case is the first and second vibration start when lost. In the case of deciding which of the timing or the first or second vibration start timing at the time of big hit at the ratio shown in the figure, the second button SW6b starts vibrating at the first vibration start timing, The big hit expectation can be made higher than when the vibration starts at the second vibration start timing.

  For example, the first vibration start timing is earlier than the second vibration start timing. Specifically, the first vibration start timing is displayed on the screen shown in FIG. 22B (the operation of the second effect button SW6b is requested). The second vibration start timing may be set as the timing before the display of the screen shown in FIG. 22 (2) or the timing after the start of the display of the same screen.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (5), it is determined whether or not “SP / SP end stage effect” is executed at different rates in the case of the loss and the big hit time. It is executed in the effect mode of moving combination act + rainbow effect. The second movable accessory operation means that the second movable accessory device 18 operates.

  In the “SP / SP first button operation effect”, the SP / SP first cut-in effect is not executed in an effect mode mainly composed of rainbow colors at the time of losing, that is, an effect mainly composed of rainbow colors. When executed in a manner, a “big hit” is established. In the “SP / SP second button operation effect”, the SP / SP second cut-in effect is not executed in an effect mode mainly composed of rainbow colors at the time of losing, that is, an effect mainly composed of rainbow colors. When executed in a manner, a “big hit” is established. Further, in the “SP / SP end stage effect”, the second movable accessory device 18 does not operate at the time of losing, that is, when the second movable accessory device 18 operates, “big hit” is determined.

  Note that in some of the plurality of specific effects shown in FIG. 21, during the execution of the specific effect, there are cases where the effect mode does not change and there are cases where the effect mode changes. If there are a plurality of change modes and the production mode does not change, and if the production mode changes, the jackpot expectation is varied depending on the change mode. Also good.

  For example, the ratio of “SP button operation effect” shown in FIG. 21 (1) executed in a red effect mode (losing time: 20%, big hit time: 40%) is finally executed in a red effect mode. As shown in the chart on the right side of FIG. 21 (1), when the effect mode remains red and does not change, and when it changes from yellow to red In some cases, the color changes from green to red, and it is determined at a different ratio between the lost time and the big hit time, and the production mode remains red. It is possible to increase the degree of expectation of jackpot when the change to green is further changed from green to red.

  Further, in some of the plurality of specific effects shown in FIG. 21, the degree of expectation that the big hit becomes “probable big hit” when the big hit is made depending on the production mode of the specific production; It may be.

  For example, when the “SP / SP second button operation effect” shown in FIG. 21 (4) is a big hit, the ratio (20%; 70%; 10%) executed in the green, red; As shown in the chart on the right side of FIG. 21 (4), the overall ratio is green, red, or rainbow. Thus, it is possible to increase the expected degree of probability variation in the direction of red in the direction of the green and the rainbow in the direction of the red rather than the red.

  Here, regarding the “SP / SP early stage effect” and “SP / SP end stage effect”, the image display device 16 is the first effect means, and the first and second movable accessory devices 17 and 18 are the second effect means. The production mode shown in FIG. 21 (2); the production of the first movable combination inactive + blue effect and the first movable combination inactivation + red effect is the first specific production, and the production shown in FIG. 21 (2). Mode: First movable combination operation + red effect and first movable combination operation + golden effect, or production mode shown in FIG. 21 (5); second movable combination operation + rainbow effect The second specific effect is configured as follows.

  In other words, the first variation effect control means 71a executes the first specific effect using one of the first and second effect means (the image display device 16, the first and second movable accessory devices 17 and 18). And the second specific effect may be executed using both of the first and second effect means. From the ratios shown in FIGS. 21 (2) and 21 (5), the second specific effect is the special figure determination means 44. When it is determined that the special game is not performed ("SP effect" is performed at the time of losing), it is determined that the special game is performed by the special figure determination means 44 ("SP effect" is performed at the time of the big hit) Is easier to implement. Further, from the ratio shown in FIG. 21 (5), the second specific effect (the second movable accessory operation in the “SP / SP end effect” + the effect by the rainbow effect) When it is determined not to be performed ("SP effect" is performed at the time of losing), it is not executed, and when it is determined by the special figure determination means 44 that a special game is to be performed ("SP effect" is performed at the time of big hit) Can be executed.

  Further, regarding the “SP button operation effect”, “SP / SP first button operation effect”, and “SP / SP second button operation effect”, the first and second effect buttons SW6a and 6b are used as operation means, and FIG. 2) and the operation mode shown in FIG. 25 (2); no light emission + no vibration is the first operation mode, and the operation modes shown in FIG. 23 (2) and FIG. 25 (2) are: blue light emission + no vibration and blue light emission + With vibration, red light emission + vibration and iridescent light emission + vibration, or blue light emission + vibration with red light emission + vibration and iridescent light emission + vibration as the second operation mode, “SP button operation effect”, or The “SP / SP first button operation effect” is set as the first specific effect, and the “SP / SP second button operation effect” is set as the second specific effect, which is configured as follows.

  That is, the first variation effect control means 71a performs the first specific effect ("SP button operation effect" or "SP / SP first button operation effect") and the second specific effect ("SP / SP second button operation effect"). )), An operation (cut-in effect) suggesting a determination result by the special figure determination unit 44 can be performed after an operation of the operation unit (one of the first and second effect buttons SW6a and 6b) is requested. 23 (1) (2), or the ratio shown in FIG. 24 and the ratio shown in FIGS. 25 (1) (2), the second specific than the case where the first specific effect is executed. When the effect is executed, the operation means is more likely to change from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.

  Further, if “SP / SP button operation effect” is excluded and only “SP / SP first button operation effect” is the first specific effect, the ratios shown in FIG. 24 and the ratios shown in FIGS. Thus, when the first specific effect is executed, the operation means does not change from the first operation mode to the second operation mode, and when the second specific effect is executed, the operation means changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. Variations can be made to the embodiment.

  23 (2) and FIG. 25 (2), if only the rainbow color emission + vibration is the second operation mode, the ratio shown in FIG. 23 (1) (2), or FIG. From the ratio and the ratios shown in FIGS. 25 (1) and (2), when the first specific effect is executed, the operation means does not change from the first operation mode to the second operation mode, and the second specific effect is executed. The operating means may change from the first operating mode to the second operating mode.

  When “SP button operation effect” and “SP / SP second button operation effect” are executed, the allocation of which operation is requested for the first and second buttons SW6a, 6b is 100%. The operation of the first button SW6a may be requested, or the operation of the second button SW6b may be requested at a rate of 100%. The second button SW6b can be omitted so that the operation of the first button SW6a is requested at a rate of 100%, and the first button so that the operation of the second button SW6b is requested at a rate of 100%. The button SW6a can be omitted.

  When the operation of the first button SW6a is requested at a rate of 100%, the determination rates shown in FIG. 23 (2) and FIG. 25 (2) are obtained according to various operation modes when the operation of the first button SW6a is requested. It can be adopted as a decision rate. That is, the first button SW6a has no light emission + no vibration, blue light emission + no vibration, blue light emission + vibration, red light emission + vibration, or rainbow color light emission + vibration. It is determined at the adopted determination rate (ratio) that is different between the time of loss and the time of big hit.

  The second button SW6b (first button SW6a) is configured to be a movable operation unit whose position and shape change automatically (electrically) in addition to causing light emission or vibration, and the movable operation unit The operation mode when changed to a position or shape different from the normal state may be set as the second operation mode. It is assumed that the movable operation unit can be operated even when the movable operation unit is changed to a position or shape different from the normal state, and the operation is detected in the same manner as the operation from the normal state.

  In addition, regarding the “SP button operation effect”, “SP / SP first button operation effect”, and “SP / SP second button operation effect”, the first and second effect buttons SW6a and 6b are used as operation means, and the first effect. The operation of the button SW6a is the first operation, the operation of the second effect button SW6b is the second operation, “SP button operation effect” or “SP / SP first button operation effect” is the first specific effect, and “SP The “SP second button operation effect” is configured as follows as the second specific effect.

  That is, the first variation effect control means 71a performs the first specific effect ("SP button operation effect" or "SP / SP first button operation effect") and the second specific effect ("SP / SP second button operation effect"). )), After requesting one of the first and second operations, it is possible to perform an effect (cut-in effect) that suggests the determination result by the special figure determination means 44, as shown in FIG. Or the ratio shown in FIG. 24 and the ratio shown in FIG. 25 (1), the second operation is performed when the second specific effect is executed rather than when the first specific effect is executed. Easy to be requested.

  If the “SP / SP button operation effect” is excluded and only the “SP / SP first button operation effect” is the first specific effect, the ratio shown in FIG. 24 and the ratio shown in FIG. The second operation may not be requested when the first specific effect is executed, and the second operation may be required when the second specific effect is executed.

  In addition, a movable operation unit whose position and shape change automatically (by electric drive) is provided (in this case, the first and second effect buttons SW6a and 6b can be omitted), and the first operation button SW6a is used as the first operation. Instead of the operation, the operation from the normal state of the movable operation unit is applied. As the second operation, instead of the operation of the second effect button SW6b, the state is changed from the normal state of the movable operation unit to the position and shape. May be applied. It is assumed that the movable operation unit can be operated even when the movable operation unit is changed to a position or shape different from the normal state, and the operation is detected in the same manner as the operation from the normal state.

Next, the number (number of times) of specific effects executed in each symbol variation effect will be described.
As shown in FIG. 26 (1), when in the “normal gaming state” and “latent probability gaming state”, and as shown in FIG. 26 (2), it is “time-short gaming state” and “probability changing gaming state”. In some cases, the number of executions of a specific effect in each symbol variation effect; any one of 0 to 5 times is performed when an “N effect” (“N lose effect” or “N reach lose effect”) is lost. “SP production” (“SP reach loss production” “SP / SP reach loss production”) is performed when lost, and “SP production” (“production per SP reach” “production per SP / SP reach”) is performed during big hits It is determined at a different rate shown in the figure.

  26 (1) and (2), from the ratios shown in FIGS. 26 (1) and (2), the big hit anticipation is in both the “normal gaming state”, the “latent probability gaming state”, and the “short time gaming state” and the “probability varying gaming state”. , The number of executions of the specific effect; it increases in the order of 1 time → 2 times → 3 times → 4 times → 5 times. In addition, the ratio in () in FIG. 26 (2) shows an example of change, that is, when “SP effect” is performed at the time of a loss when “short-time gaming state” or “probability gaming state” is specified. Number of performances: Ratio corresponding to 0 to 4 times: 68%, 15%, 10%, 5%, 2% changed to 100%, 0%, 0%, 0%, 0% respectively Number of executions of specific production when “SP production” is performed at the time of big hit; ratio corresponding to 0-5 times; 66%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 2%, 100%, It may be changed to 0%, 0%, 0%, 0%, 0%, i.e., when it is `` short-time gaming state '' or `` probability changing gaming state '', it will be `` normal gaming state '' or `` latent probability gaming state '' This indicates that a specific performance that can be performed is not performed.

  Here, any one of 1 to 4 times is a first number of times, and any one of 2 to 5 times more than any of 1 to 4 times is a second number of times. The “probable gaming state” is set as the first gaming state, and the “normal gaming state” and the “latent gaming state” are set as the second gaming state, and the configuration is as follows.

  That is, the first variation effect control means 71a executes the specific effect for the first number of times (any one to four times) and the second number (2 times to more than the first number). There are cases where a specific effect for five times is executed, and from the ratio shown in FIG. 26, the specific effect for the second number of times is the first game state ("short-time game state" "probability game state"). ) In the second gaming state (“normal gaming state”, “latent probability game” different from the first gaming state, compared to the case where it is determined that the special game is performed by the special figure determination means 44 (“SP effect” is performed at the time of big hit). In the “state”), it is easier to execute when it is determined that the special figure determination means 44 performs the special game (“SP effect” is performed at the time of big hit).

  Further, when the ratio in parentheses in FIG. 26 (2) is adopted, the specific effects for the second number of times are special figure determining means in the first game state (“short-time game state” “probability game state”). The second game state ("normal game state" "latent probability game state") that is not executed and is not executed when it is determined by 44 that the special game is to be performed ("SP effect" is performed at the time of big hit) Can be executed when it is determined that the special game is to be performed by the special figure determination means 44 ("SP effect" is performed at the time of big hit).

  It should be noted that the specific effects for the second number of times are the second game state than the case where the special game determination means 44 determines that the special game is to be performed in the first game state ("short-time game state" "probability game state"). Although it is easier to execute when the special figure determination means 44 determines that the special game is to be performed in the “normal game state” and “latent probability game state”, the specific effect for the first number of times is the first game. The second game state (“normal game state” “latent probability game state”) is determined when the special figure determination means 44 determines that the special game is performed in the state (“short-time game state” “probability game state”). The special figure determining means 44 may execute the game more easily than when it is determined that the special game is to be performed.

  The “normal game state” and the “latent probability game state” are the first game state, the “time-short game state” and the “probability game state” are the second game state, and the specific effects for the second number of times are the first game state. In the state (“normal gaming state” “latent certain gaming state”), the special figure determining means 44 determines that the special game is to be performed, and in the second gaming state (“time-short gaming state” “probability varying gaming state”). The case where it is determined that the special determination game is to be performed by the figure determination means 44 may be configured to be executed more easily, and the specific effects for the second number of times may be the first game state (“normal game state” “ In the second game state ("short-time game state" "probability game state"), the special figure determination unit 44 does not execute the special game. It is executed when it is determined to play a special game It may be configured to so that.

  Also, any one of 1 to 3 times is a first number, and any one of 2 to 4 times more than any of 1 to 3 is a second number. The “gaming state” is the first gaming state, the “normal gaming state” and the “latent gaming state” are the second gaming state and are configured as follows.

  That is, the first variation effect control means 71a executes the specific effect for the first number of times (any one to three times) and the second number of times greater than the first number (two times to two times). There are cases in which specific effects for four times are executed. From the ratio shown in FIG. 26, the specific effects for the second number of times are the first gaming state (“time-short gaming state” “probability changing gaming state”). ) In the second game state (“normal game state”, “latency probability” different from the first game state, compared to the case where the special figure determination means 44 determines that the special game is not performed (“SP effect” is performed at the time of losing). In the “game state”), it is easier to execute the case where it is determined that the special game is not performed by the special figure determination means 44 (“SP effect” is performed at the time of losing).

  Further, when the ratio in parentheses in FIG. 26 (2) is adopted, the specific effects for the second number of times are special figure determining means in the first game state (“short-time game state” “probability game state”). If the special game is determined not to be played by the game 44, the special game is not executed by the special figure determination means 44 in the second game state ("normal game state" or "latent game state") different from the first game state. It can be executed if it is determined not to do so.

  It should be noted that the specific effects for the second number of times are the second game compared to the case where the special game determination means 44 determines that the special game is not performed in the first game state ("short-time game state" "probability game state"). In the state (“normal game state” “latent probability game state”), it is easier to execute when the special figure determination means 44 determines that the special game is not performed. In the case of one gaming state (“short-time gaming state” “probability changing gaming state”), when the special figure determining means 44 determines that no special game is to be performed, the second gaming state (“normal gaming state” “latent certain gaming”). In the “state”), the special figure determination means 44 may make it easier to execute than when it is determined not to perform the special game.

  The “normal game state” and the “latent probability game state” are the first game state, the “time-short game state” and the “probability game state” are the second game state, and the specific effects for the second number of times are the first game state. In the second gaming state ("short-time gaming state" "probability changing gaming state"), compared to the case where the special figure determination means 44 determines that the special game is not performed in the state ("normal gaming state" "latent certain gaming state"). The special figure determination means 44 may be configured to be more easily executed when it is determined that the special game is not performed, and the specific effects for the second number of times may be the first game state (“normal game state”). ”“ Latent certain gaming state ”) is not executed when it is determined by the special figure judging means 44 that the special game is not performed, and the special figure is judged in the second gaming state (“ short-time gaming state ”“ probability varying gaming state ”). It is determined by means 44 that no special game will be played. It may be configured to be performed if.

  Now, in the fluctuation effect control means 71, the second fluctuation effect control means 71c (second effect control means 71c) is "SP effect" ("SP reach effect" "SP / SP reach effect" by the first change effect control means 71b. ]) Including the symbol variation effect (first game effect), that is, “SP reach lose effect”, “SP / SP reach lose effect”, “SP reach effect”, or “SP / SP reach effect” When a plurality of specific effects are executed there, it is possible to execute a second game effect that notifies in advance that at least one specific effect is performed among the plurality of specific effects. is there.

  The second game effect includes all of the “SP effects” (“SP reach loss effect”, “SP / SP reach lose effect”, “effects per SP reach”, “effects per SP / SP reach”) including specific effects. However, in this embodiment, it is executed when a predetermined second game effect execution condition is satisfied, and is not executed unless the second game effect execution condition is satisfied.

  With respect to the second game effect execution condition, as shown in FIG. 27 (1), when the game is in the “normal game state” and “latent game state”, and as shown in FIG. In the “gaming state” and “probability gaming state”, when “N production” (“N loss production” and “N reach loss production”) is performed at the time of losing, and “SP production” (“SP reach loss production” at the time of losing, respectively. “SP / SP reach lose production”) and “SP production” (“SP reach production” “SP / SP reach production”) at the time of big hit, If it is determined that two game effects are to be executed, the second game effect is executed.

  In FIG. 27 (2), the percentage in parentheses indicates an example of change, that is, the execution when the “SP effect” is performed at the time of losing in the “short time gaming state” or “probability changing gaming state”. Rate: 10%, execution rate when “SP effect” is performed at the time of big hit; 20% may be changed to 0% respectively, that is, when it is “short-time gaming state” “probability game state” This indicates that the second game effect that can be performed in the “normal game state” and the “latent game state” is not performed.

  Here, assuming that the “short-time gaming state” and “probability changing gaming state” are the first gaming state, and the “normal gaming state” and “latent certain gaming state” are the second gaming state, the second gaming effect is as shown in FIG. In the first gaming state ("short-time gaming state" "probability changing gaming state"), it is determined that the special game is performed by the special figure determination means 44 ("SP effect" is performed at the time of big hit), the first gaming state The special game determination means 44 determines that a special game is to be performed in the second game state ("normal game state" and "latent probability game state") that is different from that ("SP effect" is performed at the time of big hit). It is easy to be done.

  Further, when the ratio in () in FIG. 27 (2) is adopted, the special game determination means 44 performs the second game effect in the first game state (“short-time game state” “probability game state”). Is not executed when it is determined to perform ("SP effect" is performed at the time of big hit), and the special game is played by the special figure determination means 44 in the second game state ("normal game state" "latent game state"). It can be executed when it is determined to be performed (“SP effect” is performed at the time of big hit).

  The “normal game state” and the “latent probability game state” are the first game state, the “time-short game state” and the “probability game state” are the second game state, and the second game effect is the first game state (“normal game state” Special figure determining means 44 in the second gaming state ("short-time gaming state" "probability changing gaming state") than when special figure determining means 44 determines that a special game is determined in "gaming state" "latent certain gaming state"). May be configured to be more easily executed when it is determined that a special game is to be performed, and the second game effect is special in the first game state (“normal game state” “latent probability game state”). When it is determined that the special game is to be performed by the figure determining means 44, it is not executed, and it is determined that the special game is to be performed by the special figure determining means 44 in the second game state ("short time game state" "probability game state"). Even if configured to be able to run There.

  In addition, from the ratio shown in FIG. 27, the “second short game state” and “probability game state” are set as the first game state, and the “normal game state” and the “latent game state” are set as the second game state. In the first game state ("short-time game state" "probability game state"), the special game determination means 44 determines that the special game is not to be performed ("SP effect" is performed at the time of loss), so that the first game state In the second game state (“normal game state” and “latent game state”) different from the above, the special figure determination means 44 determines that the special game is not performed (“SP effect” is performed at the time of the loss). Easy to implement.

  Further, when the ratio in () in FIG. 27 (2) is adopted, the special game determination means 44 performs the second game effect in the first game state (“short-time game state” “probability game state”). Is not executed when it is determined that the game is not performed ("SP effect" is performed at the time of losing), and the special game is determined by the special figure determination means 44 in the second game state ("normal game state" "latent game state"). Can be executed when it is determined not to perform (“SP effect” is performed at the time of losing).

  The “normal game state” and the “latent probability game state” are the first game state, the “time-short game state” and the “probability game state” are the second game state, and the second game effect is the first game state (“normal game state” Special figure determining means in the second gaming state ("short-time gaming state" "probability changing gaming state") than when special figure determining means 44 determines that no special game is performed in "gaming state" "latent certain gaming state") It may be configured so that it is easier to be executed when it is determined by 44 that the special game is not to be performed, and the second game effect is the first game state (“normal game state” “latent probability game state”). Is not executed when it is determined by the special figure determination means 44 that the special game is not to be performed, and the special figure determination means 44 does not perform the special game in the second game state ("short time game state" "probability game state"). Can be executed if it is determined Sea urchin may be configured.

  As described above, when the second game effect execution condition is satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the second game effect is to be performed, the second variation effect control unit 71c has a plurality of different or different specific effects to be notified in advance. It is a notification mode (for example, notification modes 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 28), and any one of a plurality of notification modes having different jackpot expectations are determined, and the second game effect is executed in the determined notification mode. The contents of each notification mode shown in FIG. 28 are as shown in FIG.

  Which of the notification modes 1 to 7 executes the second game effect is determined based on the ratio shown in FIG. In addition, FIG. 29 shall show the determination rate of various alerting | reporting with respect to the symbol variation | change effect in which a specific production is performed 5 times, However, Including the ratio which determines the frequency | count of execution of the specific production shown in FIG. It is also possible to set the overall decision rate not limited to 5 times. In FIG. 29, “No notification” indicates that the second game effect is not executed, that is, the ratio of “No notification” indicates the non-execution rate obtained from the execution rate of the second game effect shown in FIG. It will be a thing.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (1), when in the “normal gaming state” and “latent probability gaming state”, and as shown in FIG. 29 (2), “time-short gaming state” “probability changing game”. In the case of “state”, whether or not the second game effect is to be executed in each symbol variation effect, and if the second game effect is to be executed, the notification mode of the second game effect in each symbol variation effect One of the notification modes 1 to 7 is “N effect” (“N lose effect” “N reach reach effect”) when lost, and “SP effect” (“SP reach lose effect” “SP · It is determined at different ratios when the “SP reach lose effect” is performed and when the “SP effect” (“SP reach per effect” “SP / SP reach per effect”) is performed during the big hit.

  29 (1) and (2), from the ratios shown in FIGS. 29 (1) and (2), the big hit expectation is in both the “normal gaming state”, the “latent probability gaming state”, and the “short time gaming state” and “probability varying gaming state” As shown in FIG. 28, the notification mode increases in the order of notification mode 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7.

  In FIG. 29 (2), the percentages in parentheses indicate examples of change, that is, notification when the “SP effect” is performed at the time of a loss in the “short-time gaming state” or “probability gaming state”. None and notification mode; ratio corresponding to notification modes 1-6; 90%, 2%, 2%, 2%, 2%, 1%, 1%, 100%, 0%, 0%, 0% respectively , 0%, 0%, 0%, no notification when “SP effect” is performed at the time of big hit, notification mode; ratio corresponding to notification modes 1-7; 70%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 3% may be changed to 100%, 0%, 0%, 0%, 0%, 0%, 0%, 0% respectively. When the “time-short gaming state” or “probability changing gaming state” is selected, it is indicated that the second game effect that can be performed in the “normal gaming state” or “latent gaming state” is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the notification mode 1 notifies in advance that a specific effect for one time is performed, the notification mode 2 notifies in advance that the specific effect for two times is performed, and 3 in the notification modes 3 and 4. Informing in advance that the specific effect for the number of times will be performed, informing modes 5 and 6 informing in advance that the specified effect for four times will be performed, and informing manner 7 informing in advance that the specific effect for five times will be performed. As described above, the expected degree of jackpot increases in the order of notification mode; notification mode 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7, and is configured as follows.

  That is, for example, any one of 1 to 2 times is set as the first predetermined number of times, and any one of 3 to 5 times is set as the second predetermined number of times. From the ratio shown in FIG. A case where a specific effect for one or two times is performed in advance, and a second predetermined number of times (any of three to five times) different from the first predetermined number of times. The big hit expectation is different from the case of notifying in advance, and specifically, it is executed in a predetermined gaming state (“normal gaming state” “latent gaming state” or “short-time gaming state” “probability changing gaming state”) In the second game effect, the second predetermined number of times (3 to 5) which is greater than the first predetermined number of times than the case where the first predetermined number of times (one or two times) of the specific effect is performed in advance. To notify in advance that a specific performance will be performed It is a big hit expectation level is higher.

  Here, for example, any one of 1 to 2 times is set as the first predetermined number of times, and any of 3 to 5 times is set as the second predetermined number of times, and the second variation effect control means 71c is set to the first predetermined number of times (1-2). In advance that a specific effect for one time) is performed in advance, and a specific effect for a second predetermined number of times (any of 3 to 5 times) greater than the first predetermined number of times is performed in advance. 29, the second game effect that is notified in advance that the specific effect for the second predetermined number of times (any of 3 to 5 times) is performed from the ratio shown in FIG. When it is determined that the special game is not performed ("SP effect" is performed at the time of losing), it is determined that the special game is performed by the special figure determination means 44 ("SP effect" is performed at the time of the big hit) Is easier to implement.

  Further, for example, any one of 1 to 4 times is set as the first predetermined number of times, and 5 times is set as the second predetermined number of times, and the second variation effect control means 71c is set to the first predetermined number of times (any of 1 to 4 times). 29, there are a case where it is notified in advance that the specific effect will be performed, and a case where it is notified in advance that the specific effect for the second predetermined number of times (five times) larger than the first predetermined number is performed, as shown in FIG. From the ratio, it is determined that the special game determination means 44 does not perform the special game as the second game effect that notifies in advance that the second specific number of times (five times) of the specific effect is performed (“SP effect” at the time of losing ”Is performed), and can be performed when it is determined by the special figure determination means 44 that a special game is to be performed (“ SP effect ”is performed at the time of big hit).

  Regarding the determination of the notification mode, any of the notification modes 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 28 is not determined based on the ratio shown in FIG. 29 but can be determined as follows.

  First, as shown in FIG. 30, at the start of special symbol variation, whether or not the second game effect execution condition is satisfied based on the determination results by the jackpot determination unit 44a, symbol determination unit 44b, and variation mode determination unit 44c. If it is determined and determined to be established, the “SP reach effect” or the “SP / SP reach effect” is executed by the change of the special symbol.

  Then, the game effect (hereinafter referred to as the first half game effect) from the start of the change of the special symbol for which the second game effect execution condition is satisfied until it reaches “reach” becomes the effect for determining the notification mode. An effect point (game point) is determined according to the effect, and one of a plurality of notification modes is determined based on the determined effect point, and immediately after becoming “reach” or “SP reach effect” The second game effect is executed in the determined notification mode in parallel with the “SP reach effect” or the “SP / SP reach effect” from the start of “SP / SP reach effect”.

  For example, in the first half game effect, as shown in FIG. 31 (1), the image display device 16 may or may not display the SU effect (“SU” means step-up). If it is displayed, one of SU1 only SU1 effects, SU2 effects switching from SU1 → SU2, SU3 effects switching from SU1 → SU2 → SU3, and SU4 effects switching from SU1 → SU2 → SU3 → SU4 are displayed. As shown in FIG. 31 (2), the illustrated points corresponding to the displayed SU effects are added to the effect points. As shown in FIG. 31 (3), which one of the SU1 effect to the SU4 effect is executed is determined at a different ratio shown in the figure at the time of the loss and at the time of the big hit.

  Further, in the first half game effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (1), after a plurality of effect symbol sequences start to fluctuate on the image display device 16, after a temporary stop at a special stop symbol (for example, “6 re 7”), The pseudo-continuous effect to be restarted may or may not be displayed. When displayed, the pseudo-continuous effect with the number of times of temporary stop with the special stop symbol is 1 and the same number is 2 times. Either a pseudo 2 continuous effect or a pseudo 3 continuous effect with the same number of times of 3 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 32 (2), the illustrated point corresponding to the displayed pseudo continuous effect is an effect point. Is added. Note that, as shown in FIG. 32 (3), which one of the pseudo 1 continuous effect to the pseudo 3 continuous effect is executed is determined at a different ratio shown in the figure at the time of the loss and at the time of the big hit.

  In addition, in various effects that can be executed in the first half game effect, when an effect in which points are added is performed, a point (for example, any one of 1 to 4) predetermined for the effect is an effect point You may make it add to. For example, in the first half of the game effect, when there is an effect that is performed through the operation of any of the effect buttons SW6a and 6b, the effect point is raised when the player performs a specific effect by operating the button at an appropriate timing. However, if the specific effect is not performed without operating the button at an appropriate timing, the effect point may not be increased.

  The second variation effect control means 71c sets the effect point to 0 at the start of the variation of the special symbol for which the second game effect execution condition is satisfied, and the point is added to the effect point as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 33, one of the notification modes 1 to 7 is determined according to the final effect point before the start of the “SP reach effect” or “SP / SP reach effect”.

  In the SU effect shown in FIG. 31, basically, the SU2 effect is performed more than the SU1 effect, the SU3 effect is performed more than the SU2 effect, and the SU4 effect is performed more than the SU3 effect. 32, the expectation level for jackpots is higher, and in the pseudo-continuous production shown in FIG. 32, basically, the pseudo-two-continuous production is performed more than the pseudo-two continuous production than the pseudo-two continuous production. The expectation of jackpot is higher when the pseudo-3 continuous performance is performed.

  In other words, the higher the performance points, the higher the jackpot expectation degree, that is, the second fluctuation effect control means 71c has different expectation degrees (hit expectation degrees) determined by the jackpot determination means 44a to play a special game. The second game effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of notification modes (notification mode 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 in the order of big hit expectation).

Next, the second game effect (notification modes 1 to 7) will be described in detail.
For example, as shown in FIG. 34, the second variation effect control means 71 c is a part that does not interfere with the display of “SP reach effect” or “SP / SP reach effect” (lower end side part, etc.) in the image display device 16. The second game effect is displayed on any one of the determined notification modes 1 to 7 on the specific display unit 16b set in the above.

  Each of the notification modes 1 to 7 is a notification mode for reporting the timing at which one or more specific effects are started, and when a plurality of specific effects are notified in advance, the plurality of specific effects start. It becomes an alerting | reporting aspect which alert | reports the timing and order which are performed.

  In the second game effect, the specific display unit 16b of the image display device 16 has an execution time of “SP reach effect” or “SP / SP reach effect” as shown in FIG. And a vertical line (moving to the right with the passage of time) indicating the current time with respect to the gauge, and 1 is displayed on this gauge. Alternatively, a production point; ▼ is displayed at a position that is the start timing of a plurality of specific productions.

  For example, in contrast to the “SP / SP reach production” shown in FIG. 20 (2), in the second game production, the display shown in any of FIGS. 35 (1) to (7) corresponding to the notification modes 1 to 7 is performed. Done.

  More specifically, in the notification mode 1 of FIG. 35 (1), a plurality of specific effects (“SP / SP early stage effect”, “SP / SP first button operation effect”, “SP / SP continuous branch effect” shown in FIG. SP / SP second button operation effect “SP / SP end effect” (for example, predetermined or selected by some determination), one specific effect (for example, “SP / SP first button” One production point corresponding to each “operation production” is displayed on the gauge.

  In the notification mode 2 of FIG. 35 (2), two specific effects (for example, “SP / SP first button operation effect” and “SP / SP continuous branch effect”) out of a plurality of specific effects (FIG. 20), respectively. Two corresponding effect points; ▼ are displayed on the gauge, and in the notification mode 3 in FIG. 35 (3), three specific effects (for example, “SP / SP 1st” among a plurality of specific effects (FIG. 20)). Three effect points corresponding to the “button operation effect”, “SP / SP continuous branch effect”, and “SP / SP second button operation effect”) are displayed on the gauge.

  In the notification mode 4 of FIG. 35 (4), three specific effects (for example, “SP / SP first button operation effect”, “SP / SP continuous branch effect”, “ SP / SP second button operation effect "), each corresponding to three effect points; ▼ and any one of the three specific effects (for example," SP / SP first button operation effect ") Type (further effect mode) (for example, “first cut-in (red)” is displayed on the gauge for “SP / SP first button operation effect”.

  In the notification mode 5 of FIG. 35 (5), four specific effects (for example, “SP / SP early stage effect”, “SP / SP first button operation effect”, “SP”, among a plurality of specific effects (shown in FIG. 20). Four effect points respectively corresponding to “SP continuous branch effect” “SP / SP second button operation effect”); ▼ and any two specific effects (for example, “SP / SP”) “First button operation effect” “SP / SP second button operation effect”) type (further effect mode) (for example, “SP / SP first button operation effect” “first cut-in (red)” , “Second cut-in (red)” for “SP / SP second button operation effect” is displayed on the gauge.

  In the notification mode 6 of FIG. 35 (6), four specific effects (for example, “SP / SP early stage effect”, “SP / SP first button operation effect”, “SP” among a plurality of specific effects (shown in FIG. 20). · SP effect branch corresponding to "SP continuation branch effect" "SP / SP second button operation effect"); ▼ and any three of the four specific effects (for example, "SP · SP "Initial stage effect", "SP / SP first button operation effect", "SP / SP second button operation effect") types (further effect modes) (for example, "SP / SP first stage effect" "actual action" , “First cut-in (red)” for “SP / SP first button operation effect”, “Second cut-in (red)” for “SP / SP second button operation effect”) on gauge Is displayed.

  In the notification mode 7 in FIG. 35 (7), among the plurality of specific effects (shown in FIG. 20), five specific effects (for example, “SP / SP early stage effect”, “SP / SP first button operation effect”, “SP”). 5 SP points corresponding to SP continuous branching effect, SP / SP second button operation effect, SP / SP end effect, and ▼ and any 4 specific effects among the 5 specific effects (For example, “SP / SP early stage effect”, “SP / SP first button operation effect”, “SP / SP second button operation effect”, “SP / SP end effect”) For “SP / SP early stage production”, for “actual operation”, for “SP / SP first button operation production” for “first cut-in (red)”, for “SP / SP second button production production” "2nd cut-in (rainbow)", "SP / SP end stage production" "The second roles material working") is displayed on the gauge for.

  In the notification mode 7, the type (display mode) corresponding to the “SP / SP second button operation effect”; the display of the second cut-in (rainbow) and the effect point corresponding to the “SP / SP end effect”; The display of “second action act” is a jackpot finalizing effect, which can be executed as a privilege only in the notification mode 7 and is not executed in the notification modes 1-6.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 36 (1), the start timing of the second game effect is “reach”, while the end timing of the second game effect is executed in advance by the second game effect. It can be set as the start time (or end time) of the last specific performance to be notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (2), in each of the notification modes 1 to 7, since the last specific effect that notifies the execution in advance is as shown in the figure, when it reaches “reach” (second game effect) The execution timing of the last specific effect that notifies the execution in advance is delayed in the order of notification mode 1 → 2 → 3−6 → 7. As described above, the expected degree of jackpot increases in the order of notification mode; notification mode 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7, so that the execution timing of the last specific effect that notifies the execution in advance is late. Indeed, the expectation level for jackpots is high.

  In addition, since the execution timing of the last specific effect informing the execution in advance is delayed in the order of notification mode 1 → 2 → 3-6 → 7, the entire notification time for informing the execution of the specific effect in advance (that is, The execution time of the second game effect becomes longer in the order of notification mode 1 → 2 → 3-6 → 7. Accordingly, the longer the overall notification time for informing the execution of the specific effect in advance, the higher the expected degree of jackpot.

  In addition, when the second game effect control unit 71c executes the second game effect in any of the notification modes 1 to 7, the second game effect state (display state) shown in FIG. (Blue), strong display state (red), weak display state → strong display state (blue → red). For example, with respect to the second game effect shown in FIG. 35, in the weak display state, it is displayed mainly in blue throughout, in the strong display state, it is displayed mainly in red throughout, and in the weak display state → strong display state, first, it is mainly displayed in blue. In the middle, the color is switched from blue to red, and the red color is displayed mainly.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (1), when in the “normal gaming state” and “latent probability gaming state”, and as shown in FIG. 37 (2), it is “time-short gaming state” and “probability changing gaming state”. Sometimes, in which state the second game effect is to be executed, “SP effect” (“SP reach lose effect” “SP / SP reach lose effect”) is performed at the time of a loss, and “SP effect” at the time of a big hit. "(" Effect per SP reach "" "Effect per SP / SP reach").

  Based on the ratio shown in FIG. 37, the jackpot expectation degree is the second game effect in both “normal gaming state”, “latent gaming state”, and “short time gaming state” and “probability gaming state”. When displaying in the strong display state than when displaying in the weak display state, it is even higher when displaying in the weak display state → strong display state than when displaying in the strong display state. Become.

  Here, for example, any one or two times is set as the first predetermined number of times, any one of three to five times is set as the second predetermined number of times, the weak display state is set as the first state, and the strong display state and the weak display state are → Using the strong display state as the second display state, it is notified in advance that a specific effect for the first predetermined number of times (any one or two times) or the second predetermined number of times (any one of three to five times) is performed. Big hit expectation when the second game effect is executed in the first state (weak display state) and when the second game effect is executed in a second state (strong display state, weak display state → strong display state) different from the first state The degree is different. Note that the second game effect may be displayed in the strongest display state (rainbow) only in the case of “big hit”, and the strongest display state (rainbow) may be the first or second state.

  The second variation effect control means 71c (second effect control means 71c) is not performed when the first variation effect control means 71b is executing the symbol variation effect including the “SP effect” 1 or It may be possible to notify in advance that a plurality of specific effects will be performed (that is, to notify the gasses).

  For example, in the notification mode 3 shown in FIG. 35 (3), as described above, “SP / SP first button operation effect”, “SP / SP continuous branch effect”, and “SP / SP second button operation effect” correspond respectively. Three performance points to be displayed; ▼ are displayed on the gauge, and at least one of them can be used as a gaze notification.

  Specifically, if only the first “SP / SP first button operation effect” to be notified in advance of the above three effects is a Gase notification, the vertical line indicating the current time is “SP / SP”. It is possible to prevent the “SP / SP first button operation effect” from being performed even when the effect point corresponding to the “first button operation effect”;

  Then, it is notified in advance that a specific effect that is not performed is performed in the second game effect having the same number of specific effects to be notified in advance or the overall second game effect regardless of the number of the specific effects ( That is to say, the smaller the number (or the larger the number) that performs the gaze notification, the higher the big hit expectation degree may be.

  The hold effect control means 72 stores the special figure hold number (total of the first and second special figure hold numbers) and a considerable number of hold symbols 16 c in the special figure hold storage means 42 at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 16. The reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol determination information and the reserved symbols corresponding to the second special symbol determination information are displayed in a distinguishable manner for each special symbol determination information. When the “SP reach effect” or “SP / SP reach effect” is executed, especially when the specific display unit 16b is set in the image display device 16 and the second game effect is displayed there, The display of the reserved symbol 16c is deleted.

  When displaying a plurality of reserved symbols 16c, from the left side to the right side in the order acquired by the special figure acquisition means 41 for the corresponding special figure determination information (that is, the order digested by the special figure reservation digest means 43). When the special figure determination information is digested by the special figure reservation digesting means 43, the corresponding leftmost reserved symbols 16c are displayed and deleted, and the remaining reserved symbols 16c are shifted to the left by one and displayed. .

  There are a plurality of types of display modes of the reserved symbols 16c (○ Δ ☆ shown in FIG. 38), ○ is a normal display mode, Δ ☆ is a pre-reading display mode different from normal, and each of the held symbols 16c has a plurality of types of display modes. ; Displayed as one of ○ △ ☆. In FIG. 2, the two reserved symbols 16c are both displayed in the normal display mode;

  Then, based on the determination result by the prior determination means 44d, the special figure determination information that is the target until the special figure determination information that is the target of the pre-reading effect that has been reserved is digested by the special figure reservation digestion means 43. By changing the display mode of the reserved symbol 16c corresponding to ； to any of Δ ☆, and further changing the display mode; △ to ☆, it can be expected to be a “big hit”. .

  In the special game effect control means 73, a special game is executed by the special game execution means 46 based on an image (moving image) displayed on the image display device 16 and a sound output from the speaker 37 in accordance with the image. Sometimes, a special game selected from a plurality of special game effects (special game effects 1, 2, 3... N) shown in FIG. 12 (2) based on the opening command received at the start of the special game. An ending effect selected from a plurality of ending effects (ending effects 1, 2, 3,... N) shown in FIG. 12 (3) based on the ending command received at the end of the special game effect. To do.

  The pre-reading effect control means 74 determines whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect based on the special figure holding increase command received at the time of acquisition of the special symbol information, that is, the determination result by the prior determination means 44d, and determines that the pre-reading effect is performed. In this case, the determination result (special game expectation degree) by the pre-determination means 44d based on the symbol variation effect and the reserved symbol before the special symbol information is digested with respect to the special symbol information targeted for the pre-reading effect. ) And prefetching that can increase the expectation of jackpot.

  With regard to the prefetching effect by the symbol variation effect, the prefetching effect control means 74 is in the “normal game state” or “latent probability game state”, for example, as shown in FIG. For the special figure determination information for which the prior determination for determining the time (“losing”) has been performed, the “look-ahead mode” is selected at a rate of 2%, and the second type variation time (“losing”) is determined. For special figure determination information that has been pre-determined, select "look-ahead mode" at a rate of 5%, and special figure determination for which pre-determination has been made to determine the type 3 variation time ("big hit") For information, select “look-ahead mode” at a rate of 20%.

  In the design fluctuation effect control means 71, the effect mode setting means 71a is set to "prefetch mode" by the prefetch effect control means 74 when "normal mode" or "latent probability mode" or "latency suggestion mode" is set. Is selected at the timing determined by the pre-reading effect control means 74 (based on the scenario), it is changed to the “pre-reading mode”, that is, the symbol variation effect is performed in the “pre-reading mode”. When the variation display of the special symbol based on the special figure determination information is finished and does not become “big hit”, the display mode is changed again to the “normal mode”, “latent probability mode”, or “latent probability suggestion mode”.

  Regarding the pre-reading effect by the reserved symbol, the pre-reading effect control unit 74 performs a pre-determination to determine the first type variation time (“losing”) as the display pattern of the reserved symbol 16c, for example, as shown in FIG. For special figure determination information, pre-determination is performed in which the display mode is selected at a rate of 5%; △ is displayed at a rate of 0%; ☆ is selected, and the second type variation time ("losing") is determined. For the special figure determination information, 30% of the display mode; △, 10% of the display mode; ☆ select and determine the type 3 variation time ("big hit") For the special figure determination information that has been performed, select the display mode at a rate of 10%; Δ, the display mode at a rate of 30%;

  When the display mode; Δ is selected by the pre-reading effect control unit 74, the holding effect control unit 72 determines the special figure as the target at the timing determined by the pre-reading effect control unit 74 (based on the scenario). The display mode of the reserved symbol 16c corresponding to the information; ○ is changed to Δ and the display mode is selected by the pre-reading effect control means 74; when ☆ is selected (at the timing determined by the pre-reading effect control means 74 (based on the scenario) The display mode of the reserved symbol 16c corresponding to the special figure determination information that is the target; ○ is changed to ☆, or the display mode is changed stepwise from Δ to ☆.

The operations and effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above are as follows.
When the player is in the “normal gaming state” or “latent gaming state”, the player operates the firing handle 7 to fire the game ball so that the game ball falls on the left side of the center object 15. The game ball is dropped on the right side of the center object 15 by operating the firing handle 7 when the game is played by “hitting” and the game is in the “short-time game state” or “probability game state” or when the special game is being played. As described above, a game is played by so-called “right-handed” in which a game ball is launched.

  When the first starting port 10 can be aimed by “left-handed” and the first special figure holding number is less than 4, and the game ball wins the first starting port 10, the first special figure determination information is acquired. It is stored in the special figure hold storage means 42 and the first special figure hold number increases by one.

  On the other hand, by “right-handed”, the second starting port 11a and the gate 12 can be aimed, and when the second special figure holding number is less than 4, when the game ball wins the second starting port 11a, the second special figure The determination information is acquired and stored in the special figure hold storage means 42. When the second special figure hold number increases by 1 and the normal figure hold number is less than 4, the game figure passes through the gate 12, and the common figure determination is made. Information is acquired and stored in the ordinary figure storage means 52, and the number of ordinary drawings is increased by one.

  Here, first, the general symbol determination information stored in the general symbol hold storage means 52 is sequentially digested (erased) every time the change of the normal symbol starts, the number of general symbol hold is reduced by 1, and an auxiliary game lottery is performed. . Then, the normal symbol is variably displayed on the general symbol display 19c, and when winning in the auxiliary game lottery, the auxiliary game winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and an auxiliary game in which the second start port 11a is opened is generated.

  In the “normal game state” or the “latent game state”, even if “right-handed” is performed, almost no winning of a game ball to the first start port 10 can be expected, and the low operation mode is set as the second start port operation mode. Because it is set and almost no winning of game balls to the second starting port 11a can be expected, the game is performed by reducing the number of owned game balls by “left-handed”, and in the “short-time game state” or “probability game state” Since the high operation mode is set as the second start port operation mode and “right-handed” is performed, a relatively large number of game balls can be expected to win the second start-up port 11a. A game can be played with the number of balls substantially maintained.

  The special figure determination information stored in the special figure storage unit 42 is sequentially digested (erased) every time the change of the special symbol starts. At that time, a plurality of special figure determination information is stored in the special figure storage unit 42. If there is, the plurality of special figure determination information is digested in the order of acquisition (memory), and if both the first and second special figure determination information are stored, the second special figure The determination information is digested in preference to the first special figure determination information, the special figure reservation number (any of the first and second special figure reservation numbers) is decreased by 1, and a special game lottery is performed. Then, the special symbol is variably displayed on either of the special symbol indicators 19a and 19bc, and when winning in the special game lottery, the big hit symbol is stopped and a special game is generated in which the big winning opening 13a is opened.

  In special games, depending on the type of jackpot symbol that has been suspended, the grand prize opening 13a is opened for either the 16R long-term opening or the 8R long-term opening. Then, for example, about 2000 game balls can be acquired, and for 8R long-term release, for example, about 1000 game balls can be acquired. Further, depending on the type of the big hit symbol that has been fluctuated and stopped, any one of “normal game state”, “latent probability game state”, “time-short game state”, and “probability variable game state” is set as the game state after the end of the special game.

  As for the opening pattern of the special prize opening 13a in the special game and the game state after the special game is over, it is won by the special game lottery based on the second special figure determination information (winning of the game ball to the second start opening 11a). In such a case, the percentage that is advantageous to the player is higher than that in the case of winning in the special game lottery based on the first special figure determination information (the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10).

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is variably displayed, the symbol variation effect based on the result of the special game lottery is displayed, and when the special game is performed, the special game effect and the ending effect are respectively displayed on the image display device 16. Is displayed mainly, thereby further enhancing game playability and game entertainment.

  The player, of course, wins the special game lottery, the special game is played, the special game is more advantageous (the number of game balls acquired is large), the special game is finished, The game is played in the hope that it will be in a more advantageous game state (“probability game state”), but the symbol changes in the process until the result of the special game lottery is derived (the special symbol starts to change and then stops) Enjoy the production and play games while expecting to be a “big hit”.

  That is, the player expects to become “reach” when a plurality of effect symbols start to fluctuate (special symbols start to fluctuate) in the symbol fluctuating effect, and then to “reach”. Then, “SP Reach Production”, “SP Reach Production” and “SP Reach Production”, which have a higher expectation of hitting than “SP Reach Production”, and “SP Reach Production” and “SP / SP Reach Production” You can play games in the hope that you will win a big hit.

  By the way, when the “SP production” (“SP reach production” “SP / SP reach production”) is executed, in the “SP production”, the player can achieve the big hit expectation, that is, the special game lottery. A plurality of specific effects that suggest the result of the above are started sequentially at different timings, but it is difficult for the player to know in advance that all or part of the plurality of specific effects will be performed. Are often uncertain.

  Therefore, the “SP effect” is executed by the first change effect control unit 71 b and the first change effect control unit 71 b that allow the change effect control unit 71 to execute the “SP effect” including a plurality of specific effects. The second variation effect control means 71b capable of executing a second game effect that notifies in advance that at least one of the plurality of specific effects is performed in the “SP effect”.

  And when the 2nd variation production control means 71b performs a 2nd game production, the information mode in any one of a plurality of information modes (information modes 1-7) from which the number or kind of specific effects to report beforehand differ from each other. Since the second game effect is executed, the performance can be improved.

  Specifically, it is as follows. First, in executing the second game effect in the symbol variation effect, it is assumed that the “SP effect” is performed, that is, one or more specific effects are performed. As shown in the figure, the greater the number of executions, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpots. Therefore, in order to become a “hit”, the player can execute a specific effect for a greater number of times, and the specific effect is special. If the suggestion effect suggests the result of the game lottery, it can be expected that the specific effect (suggestion effect) is executed in an effect mode with a higher degree of big hit expectation.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 26, the specific effects for each number of times are “normal game state” and “latent probability game state” in the “normal game state” and “latent probability game state” than in the case of “big hit” in the “short-time gaming state” and “probability changing gaming state”. It is easier to execute when it is a “hit”, or it is not executed when it is “hit” in the “short-time gaming state” or “probability changing gaming state”, and it is “hit” in the “normal gaming state” or “latent gaming state” In addition, it is possible to be executed in the case of “losing” in “normal gaming state” and “latent gaming state” rather than “losing” in “short-time gaming state” and “probability changing gaming state”. Can be executed when it is easy to be executed, or when it becomes “losing” in the “normal gaming state” or “latent certain gaming state” instead of being executed when it becomes “losing” in the “short-time gaming state” or “probability changing gaming state” Therefore, “SP” in “short-time gaming state” and “probability gaming state” The output ", it is possible to" normal game state "simplified than" SP demonstration "in the" latent 確遊 Technical state "(simplicity).

  In the “short-time gaming state” and “probability changing gaming state”, the game ball is more likely to win the second starting port 11a (the special figure determination information is put on hold) than in the “normal gaming state” and “latent certain gaming state”. Since the variation time (pending digestion time of special figure determination information) is shortened and special game lotteries are performed one after another, especially in the “probable game state”, the probability of a big hit is high. Since it is promised that the game will be performed, based on such a game, the “SP effect” in the “short-time game state” and the “probability game state” is simplified (simplified), so that “the normal game state” “ Differentiating from “SP production” in “latent game state”, the contents of “SP production” in “normal game state” and “latent game state” can be enhanced, and the balance of overall production can be improved. .

  Moreover, as a specific effect which is a suggestion effect that suggests the result of the special game lottery, as shown in FIGS. 21 (2) and 21 (5), when the specific effect is executed using only the image display device 16, and the image display In some cases, the specific effect is executed using both the device 16 and the first or second movable accessory device 17 or 18, and both the image display device 16 and the first or second movable accessory device 17 or 18 are used. The specific effect using is easier to execute in the case of “big hit” than in the case of “losing”, or is not executed in the case of “losing” but can be executed in the case of “big hit” Therefore, the player can expect that a specific effect is executed using both the image display device 16 and the first or second movable accessory device 17 or 18 in order to become a “hit”.

  Further, as the specific effect, as shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the “SP / SP second button operation effect” is performed rather than the case where “SP button operation effect” or “SP / SP first button operation effect” is executed. ”Is more easily changed from an operation mode in which the second effect button SW6b does not emit light or vibrates to an operation mode in which light emission and / or vibration occurs, or“ SP / SP first button operation effect ”is executed. The second effect button SW6b does not change to the operation mode in which the second effect button SW6b emits light and / or vibrates, and the “SP / SP second button operation effect” is executed, the second effect button SW6b emits light and / or vibrates. Since the operation mode can be changed, a plurality of button effects are differentiated from each other. In particular, in the “SP / SP second button operation effect” near the end of the “SP effect”, the second effect button SW6b is issued. And / or by the ease of changing the operating mode of vibration, it can increase the effect of.

  Further, as the specific effect, as shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the “SP / SP second button operation effect” is performed rather than the case where “SP button operation effect” or “SP / SP first button operation effect” is executed. Is executed more easily, the operation of the second effect button SW6b is more easily requested, or the operation of the second effect button SW6b is not required when the “SP / SP first button operation effect” is executed. When the “SP / SP second button operation effect” is executed, the operation of the second effect button SW6b may be requested, so that the plurality of button effects are differentiated from each other, especially near the end of the “SP effect” In the “SP / SP second button operation effect”, it is possible to improve the performance by making it easier to request the operation of the second effect button SW6b.

  And the 2nd game production which notifies beforehand that at least 1 specific production is performed among a plurality of specific productions including the above-mentioned various special productions is made into a plurality of information modes (notification modes 1-7 with different big hit expectation degrees). ).

  In this case, the second game effect is easier to be executed in the case of “big hit” than the case of “losing”, and the number of second game effects informing the execution in advance in the second game effect. The greater the number of games, the higher the expected degree of jackpot. Therefore, in order to become a “hit”, the player first expects the second game effect to be executed, and when the second game effect is executed, In the two game effects, it can be expected that more specific effects will be notified in advance.

  Here, the second game effect is executed in the case of “big hit” in “normal game state” and “latent probability game state” rather than “big hit” in “short-time game state” and “probability changed game state”. It can be executed when it is easy to be played, or when it becomes a “hit” in the “normal gaming state” or “latent probability gaming state” instead of being executed when it is “hit” in the “short-time gaming state” or “probability changing gaming state”, In addition, it is easier to execute in the case of “losing” in the “normal gaming state” and “latent gaming state” than in the case of “losing” in the “short-time gaming state” and “probability changing gaming state”, or in the “short-time gaming state” It is not executed when it becomes “losing” in the “state” “probability gaming state”, but it can be executed when it becomes “losing” in the “normal gaming state” or “latent gaming state”, so the second game effect is mainly used. It can be executed in “normal gaming state” and “latent gaming state” Kill.

  As described above, in the “short-time gaming state” and “probability changing gaming state”, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting port 11a than in the “normal gaming state” and “latent gaming state”, and the special figure variation time is shortened. Since the special game lottery is performed one after another, especially in the “probability game state”, the probability of a big hit is high, and in this embodiment, it is promised that the next special game will be practically performed. By executing the second game effect mainly in the “normal game state” and the “latent game state”, the second game effect in the “normal game state” and the “latent game state” is enhanced and the overall effect is achieved. The balance can be improved.

  In addition, the second game effect is displayed more weakly in the strong display state (red) than in the weak display state (blue) than in the strong display state (red). When the game is executed in the state → strong display state (blue → red), the big hit expectation is higher, that is, the player becomes “hit”, so the second game effect is in the strong display state (red) Furthermore, it can be expected to be executed in a weak display state → strong display state (blue → red).

The first embodiment may be partially changed as follows.
(1) As for the start timing of the second game effect, as described above, in addition to the time when it becomes “reach”, the start of “SP effect” (“SP reach effect” “SP / SP reach effect”) Or a predetermined timing when the first half game effect is being performed (before becoming “reach”).

(2) The second game effect is initially executed in the first notification mode of the plurality of notification modes (notification modes 1 to 7), and in the middle of the execution, the plurality of notification modes (notification modes 1 to 7). ) May be switched to the second notification mode having a higher jackpot expectation than the first notification mode, and the second notification mode may be executed. For example, FIG. 41 shows an example of switching from the reporting mode 3 to the reporting mode 6, and FIG. 42 shows an example of switching from the reporting mode 2 to the reporting mode 3 → the reporting mode 6.

(3) When executing the second game effect in a notification mode for notifying the type of specific effect (notification mode), the type of specific effect (notification mode) is not initially notified of the type of specific effect (notification mode). ) May be notified, and the type (notification mode) of the specific effect may be notified by the operation of the effect operation device 6.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 43, (1) for a specific effect that is a target for notifying the type (notification mode), an effect (s) that prompts the player to operate the effect button SW6a above the point; When there are two specific effects for which the effect buttons and arrows are displayed and (2) (3) types (notification modes) are to be notified, the effect button SW6a is operated before the specific effects are performed. Then, first, the type of specific effect (effect mode) performed before is displayed, and when the effect button SW6a is further operated, the type of specific effect (effect mode) to be performed later is displayed.

(4) As a notification mode of the second game effect, a gauge or the like is displayed, and one or more specific effects are displayed so that the start timing can be understood, but the start timing is not clarified. For example, as shown in FIG. 44, a plurality of specific effects to be performed may be displayed side by side in a time series in the order of starting, as shown in FIG. Although not shown, only the number of specific effects to be performed may be notified in advance.

  Even in this case, the execution rate of the second game effect (each of a plurality of notification modes having different numbers and types of specific effects to be notified in advance) (the execution rate at the time of losing in the normal / latent game state and at the time of big hit) The execution rate at the time of loss / hit in the short / probable gaming state is the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, the greater the number of specific effects to be notified in advance, the higher the expectation of jackpot, and the state in which the second game effect is executed (displayed) is the weak display state (blue display), the strong display state (red) Display), weak display state → strong display state (blue display → red display) in order of big hit expectation.

(5) In the second game effect, in the first embodiment, the fact that a plurality of specific effects are performed is notified in advance, but first, only the first specific effect is performed. In advance, after the specific effect is performed, only the specific effect to be executed next is notified, and so on, so that a plurality of specific effects are performed one by one in advance. It may be. In this case, in order to notify the timing when the specific effect is performed, a timer display that subtracts the time from the current time until the timing when the specific effect is performed may be applied as shown in FIG. The display shown in FIG. 45 (1) indicates that some specific effect is performed after 16 seconds.

  In such a timer effect, the timer is set to 0 by subtraction slightly before the start timing of the corresponding specific effect (for example, 1-2 seconds before), and immediately after that, the corresponding specific effect is started. In the meantime, as shown in FIG. 45 (2), the corresponding specific effect type (first cut-in (red) in FIG. 45 (2)) may be displayed.

  In addition, in the timer effect shown in FIG. 45 (1), it is not known how many times the timer effect will be performed at the present time, that is, how many times the specific effect will be performed, but the timer effect shown in FIG. 45 (3). As shown in FIG. 45, the display indicating how many times the timer effect (that is, the specific effect) will be performed during or after the timer effect is performed (in FIG. 45 (3), “the timer effect is performed two times later”). “Timer stock = 2”) may be displayed.

  Even in this case, the execution rate of each of the second game effects (each of the plurality of notification modes having different timer effects) (in the normal / latent probability game state, the execution rate at the time of the losing and the big hit, in the short time / probable variable game state) The execution rate at the time of the loss and the big hit is the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, the greater the number of times that the timer effect is executed, the higher the expectation of jackpot, and the state in which the timer effect is executed (displayed) is the weak display state (blue display), the strong display state (red display), or the weak display. In the order of state → strong display state (blue display → red display), the big hit expectation degree becomes higher.

(6) As a specific effect, in addition to the effect performed in the “SP effect”, various effects performed in the first half game effect (before becoming “reach”); for example, pseudo 1 continuous effect, pseudo 2 shown in FIG. You may apply a continuous production and a pseudo 3 continuous production.

(7) As shown in FIG. 46, the first variation effect control means 71b indicates “success effect big hit” and “short time big hit” (or “latent big hit” or “normal big hit”, which suggests that “probable big hit”. It may be possible to execute a “success / failure effect” capable of performing any of the “unsuccessful effects” suggesting that there is a possibility of “

  For example, in the “SP production” in the “probability game state” (or other game state), the “battle production” in which the teammates and enemies fight is performed. In this `` win / decision production '', this `` battle production '' or `` win / decision production '' is set as `` success / decision production ''. “Victory production” in which the ally defeats the enemy and wins can be “successful production”, and “defeat production” in which the ally is defeated by the enemy and defeated can be “unsuccessful production”.

  For example, when a “successful effect” is performed, a stop symbol sequence (for example, “777”) with an odd number of symbols is finally displayed as an effect symbol sequence, and becomes “probable big hit”, while “unsuccessful” When the “production” is performed, a stop symbol sequence (for example, “444”) with even-numbered symbols is finally displayed and becomes “time / short hit big hit” (or “latent big hit” or “normal big hit”).

  Here, the “success effect” can be set as one of the specific effects. If the execution of the “success effect” is notified in advance by the second variation effect control means 71c, the “success effect” is executed. By now, it will be decided that it will be a “probable big hit”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the first variation effect control means 71b is an effect that is performed after the “unsuccessful effect” and indicates a “re-challenge effect” that suggests whether or not it will be a “probable big hit”. It may be executable. For example, an “unsuccessful effect” is performed, a stop symbol string (for example, “767”) of the odd-numbered pattern breaks is temporarily stopped, and then a “re-challenge effect” is executed. In the “re-challenge production”, it is possible to perform either a “resurrection success production” that suggests a “probable big hit” or a “continuation production” that suggests “losing”.

  For example, after a “defeat effect” in which an ally is defeated by an enemy, the door is closed on the display of the image display device 16, an operation valid period is set, and the effect button SW 6 a (or 6 b) is given to the player. The “door opening operation effect”, which requires an operation (continuous hitting or long press) and the door gradually opens as a result of this operation, is the “re-challenge effect”, and finally the door opens in this “door opening operation effect” “Door opening effect” can be set as “Restoration success effect”, and “Door not opening effect” where the door is not finally opened can be set as “Continuous effect”.

  For example, when a “revival success production” is performed, a stop symbol sequence (for example, “777”) with an odd number of symbols is finally displayed as the production symbol sequence, and becomes “probable big hit”, while “continue” When the “effect” is performed, a stop symbol string (for example, “767”) of the broken odd-numbered symbols is finally displayed and becomes “lost”.

  Here, the “re-challenge effect” can be one of the above-mentioned specific effects, and if the execution of the “re-challenge effect” is notified in advance by the second variation effect control means 71c, the “re-challenge effect” It is determined that the “short time big hit” (or “latent big hit” or “normal big hit”) will not be reached until is executed. In addition, the “resurrection success effect” can be one of the specific effects, and when the execution of the “resurrection success effect” is notified in advance by the second fluctuation effect control means 71c, the “resurrection success effect” is displayed. By the time it is executed, it will be determined that it will be a “probable big hit”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the first variation effect control means 71b performs “success effect” in “success / failure effect” (“probability big hit”) and suggests “expected degree suggestion effect” that suggests the expected probability of change. In the “Responsibility Directing”, the “Resuccess Produce” indicates that the probability change expectation is high and the Probability Expectation is low. May be configured to be different from each other (becomes “probable big hit”).

  For example, as the “expectation suggestion effect”, the one or more suggested effects (specific effects) to be executed can be used. Therefore, with respect to each suggestion effect, when any one of a plurality of effect modes is “probable big hit” and “time / short hit big” (or “latent big hit” or “normal big hit”) When the suggestion effect is executed with the determined effect mode determined at different ratios, and when the probability change expectation level is suggested to be high and the probability change expectation level is suggested to be low So that there is.

  As a specific example, when the SP button operation effect shown in FIG. 21 (1) is executed in a yellow effect mode, the probability change expectation level is suggested to be low. When the SP / SP early stage production shown in FIG. 21 (2) is executed with the first movable accessory inactive + blue effect, or the first movable accessory inactive + red effect. The probability variation expectation is suggested to be low, and when the first movable accessory operation + red effect or the first movable accessory operation + gold effect is executed, the probability variation expectation is suggested to be high.

  In this way, the determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player, the effect control means for performing a predetermined effect based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination means A special game control means capable of performing a first special game or a second special game that is disadvantageous to the first special game when it is determined to be performed, wherein the effect control means includes the first special game. A success effect that suggests that the second special game may be performed and a success or failure effect that can be performed, and that is performed after the unsuccessful effect. A re-challenge effect that suggests whether or not the first special game is performed, and an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation degree that the success effect is performed in the success / failure effect, The period In the degree suggestion effect, it is suggested that the first special game is performed in the re-challenge effect when it is suggested that the expectation is high and when the expectation is low. The probabilities can be different from each other.

  Here, the re-challenge effect is an effect suggesting whether the first special game or the second special game is performed, whether the first special game is performed, the first special game, and the second This is an effect that suggests that none of the special games will be played.

  Here, also in the conventional gaming machine, in the symbol variation effect, a plurality of effect symbols start to vary with the start of the variation of the special symbol on the image display device, and finally the stop symbol sequence corresponding to the determination symbol of the special symbol However, various effects can be executed during the period from when the plurality of effect symbols start to change until the effect stops. For example, when the special symbol is variably displayed with a relatively long variation time, in the symbol variation effect according to the variation time, after the effect to reach the reach state that suggests the possibility of the special game being performed, Expectation level at which a special game is performed; a reach effect is executed in any of a plurality of effect modes having different jackpot expectations. For example, if the reach effect is executed in a performance mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation level in the symbol variation effect, the player can achieve the jackpot expectation level in the reach effect, that is, the result of the jackpot determination is suggested. A plurality of specific effects are sequentially executed at different timings, but it is difficult for a player to know in advance that all or a part of the plurality of specific effects will be performed, and it may be uncertain even if predicted. Many.

  Based on the first embodiment, the present invention can be configured as follows. In the present invention, for example, when the reach effect is executed in an effect mode in which the big hit expectation degree is relatively high in the symbol variation effect, the player can achieve the big hit expectation degree in the reach effect. A plurality of specific effects suggesting the result of the determination are sequentially executed at different timings, but it is difficult for the player to know in advance that all or a part of the plurality of specific effects will be performed. However, there is a problem that there are many uncertain cases, and it has been made in view of this problem, and as a result, it is possible not only to make it possible to notify in advance that a specific effect is executed, but also to improve the performance Become.

The present invention comprises determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, and effect control means for executing a game effect based on a determination result by the determination means, wherein the effect control means Is a first effect control means capable of executing a plurality of specific effects, and when the plurality of specific effects are executed by the first effect control means, at least one specific effect among the plurality of specific effects. A second effect control means capable of executing a second game effect for informing that the game is performed in advance, wherein the second effect control means has a plurality of notification modes having different degrees of expectation for performing the special game. The second game effect can be executed at any of the above, and in the second game effect, a notification that the specific effect for the first predetermined number of times is performed in advance is different from the first predetermined number of times. 2 predetermined times The degree of expectation is different from the case of notifying in advance that a specific effect for the minute is performed, and the second game effect is more than the case where it is determined that the determination means performs the special game in the first game state. It is easier to execute when it is determined by the determination means that a special game is to be performed in a second game state different from the one game state.

  In the present invention, the second game effect is not executed when it is determined by the determination means that a special game is to be performed in the first game state.

The present invention comprises a determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, and an effect control means for executing a game effect based on a determination result by the determination means, the effect control means Is a first effect control means capable of executing a plurality of specific effects, and when the plurality of specific effects are executed by the first effect control means, at least one specific effect among the plurality of specific effects. A second effect control means capable of executing a second game effect for informing that the game is performed in advance, wherein the second effect control means has a plurality of notification modes having different degrees of expectation for performing the special game. The second game effect can be executed at any of the above, and in the second game effect, a notification that the specific effect for the first predetermined number of times is performed in advance is different from the first predetermined number of times. 2 predetermined times The degree of expectation is different from the case of notifying in advance that the specific effect of the minute is performed, and the second game effect is more than the case where the determination means determines that the special game is not performed in the first game state. It is easier to execute the case where it is determined by the determination means that the special game is not performed in the second game state different from the first game state.

  In the present invention, the second game effect is not executed when it is determined by the determination means that no special game is performed in the first gaming state.

The present invention comprises determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, and effect control means for executing a game effect based on a determination result by the determination means, wherein the effect control means Is a first effect control means capable of executing a plurality of specific effects, and when the plurality of specific effects are executed by the first effect control means, at least one specific effect among the plurality of specific effects. A second effect control means capable of executing a second game effect for informing that the game is performed in advance, wherein the second effect control means has a plurality of notification modes having different degrees of expectation for performing the special game. The second game effect can be executed at any one of the above, and in the second game effect, the fact that the specific effect for the first predetermined number of times is performed is notified in advance, and more than the first predetermined number of times. Second predetermined There is a case where it is notified in advance that a specific effect for several minutes is performed, and the second game effect that notifies in advance that the specific effect for the second predetermined number of times is performed does not perform a special game by the determination means. Is more likely to be executed when it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be performed.

  In addition, according to the present invention, the second game effect that notifies in advance that the specific effect for the second predetermined number of times is performed is not executed when it is determined by the determination means that the special game is not performed.

The present invention comprises determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, and effect control means for executing a game effect based on a determination result by the determination means, wherein the effect control means Is a first effect control means capable of executing a plurality of specific effects, and when the plurality of specific effects are executed by the first effect control means, at least one specific effect among the plurality of specific effects. A second effect control means capable of executing a second game effect for informing that the game is performed in advance, wherein the second effect control means has a plurality of notification modes having different degrees of expectation for performing the special game. The second game effect can be executed at any one of the above, and in the second game effect executed in a predetermined game state, a case where a specific effect for the first predetermined number of times is performed in advance is notified. Said Person in the case of advance notification that the second specific effect of a given number of times greater than a predetermined number of times is performed is to the expected degree becomes high.

The present invention comprises determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, and effect control means for executing a game effect based on a determination result by the determination means, wherein the effect control means Is a first effect control means capable of executing a plurality of specific effects, and when the plurality of specific effects are executed by the first effect control means, at least one specific effect among the plurality of specific effects. A second effect control means capable of executing a second game effect for informing that the game is performed in advance, wherein the second effect control means has a plurality of notification modes having different degrees of expectation for performing the special game. The second game effect can be executed at any of the above, and in the second game effect, a notification that the specific effect for the first predetermined number of times is performed in advance is different from the first predetermined number of times. 2 predetermined times The degree of expectation is different from the case where the specific effect is to be performed in advance, and the first effect control means is configured to execute the specific effect for the first number of times and the first number of times. There may be a case where the second specific number of specific effects are executed, and the second number of specific effects is more than the case where the determination means determines that the special game is performed in the first gaming state. It is easier to execute when it is determined by the determination means that a special game is to be performed in a second game state different from the one game state.

  In the present invention, the specific effects for the second number of times are not executed when it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be performed in the first game state.

The present invention comprises determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, and effect control means for executing a game effect based on a determination result by the determination means, wherein the effect control means Is a first effect control means capable of executing a plurality of specific effects, and when the plurality of specific effects are executed by the first effect control means, at least one specific effect among the plurality of specific effects. A second effect control means capable of executing a second game effect for informing that the game is performed in advance, wherein the second effect control means has a plurality of notification modes having different degrees of expectation for performing the special game. The second game effect can be executed at any of the above, and in the second game effect, a notification that the specific effect for the first predetermined number of times is performed in advance is different from the first predetermined number of times. 2 predetermined times The degree of expectation is different from the case where the specific effect is to be performed in advance, and the first effect control means is configured to execute the specific effect for the first number of times and the first number of times. There are cases where a large number of specific effects for the second number of times are executed, and the specific effects for the second number of times are more than the case where the determination means determines that the special game is not performed in the first game state. It is easier to execute the case where it is determined by the determination means that the special game is not performed in the second game state different from the first game state.

  In the present invention, the specific effects for the second number of times are not executed when it is determined by the determination means that the special game is not performed in the first gaming state.

The present invention comprises determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, and effect control means for executing a game effect based on a determination result by the determination means, wherein the effect control means Is a first effect control means capable of executing a plurality of specific effects, and when the plurality of specific effects are executed by the first effect control means, at least one specific effect among the plurality of specific effects. A second effect control means capable of executing a second game effect for informing that the game is performed in advance, wherein the second effect control means has a plurality of notification modes having different degrees of expectation for performing the special game. The second game effect can be executed at any of the above, and in the second game effect, a notification that the specific effect for the first predetermined number of times is performed in advance is different from the first predetermined number of times. 2 predetermined times The degree of expectation is different from the case where the specific effect is to be performed in advance, and the first effect control means executes the first specific effect using one of the first and second effect means; The second specific effect may be executed using both of the first and second effect means, and the second specific effect is more than the case where the determination means determines that the special game is not performed. The case where it is determined by the determination means that a special game is to be performed is easier to execute.

  In the present invention, the second specific effect can be executed after execution of the first specific effect, and is not executed when the determination means determines that no special game is to be performed.

The present invention comprises determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, and effect control means for executing a game effect based on a determination result by the determination means, wherein the effect control means Is a first effect control means capable of executing a plurality of specific effects, and when the plurality of specific effects are executed by the first effect control means, at least one specific effect among the plurality of specific effects. A second effect control means capable of executing a second game effect for informing that the game is performed in advance, wherein the second effect control device is configured to perform a first predetermined number of times in the second game effect. The degree of expectation for performing the special game differs between the case where the specific effect is performed in advance and the case where the specific effect for the second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number is performed in advance. First place A case in which the second game effect that is notified in advance that the specific effect for the number of times or the second predetermined number of times is performed is executed in the first state and the second state different from the first state; The degree of expectation is different.

The present invention provides a determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, an operation means that can be operated by the player and can be changed between a first operation mode and a second operation mode, And an effect control means for executing a game effect based on a determination result by the determination means, wherein the effect control means includes a first effect control means capable of executing a plurality of specific effects, and the first effect control. Second effect control means capable of executing a second game effect that notifies in advance that at least one of the plurality of specific effects is performed when the plurality of specific effects are executed by the means; And the second effect control means is capable of executing the second game effect in any of a plurality of notification modes having different expectation levels for performing the special game, and in the second game effect, A specific production for a certain number of times The degree of expectation differs between the case of notifying in advance and the case of notifying in advance that a specific effect for a second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times will be performed. The first specific effect and the second specific effect executed after the first specific effect can be executed, and the case where the second specific effect is executed is more than the case where the first specific effect is executed. The operation means is likely to change from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.

  Further, the present invention provides a determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player, an operation means that can be operated by the player and can be changed between a first operation mode and a second operation mode, And an effect control means for executing a game effect based on a determination result by the determining means, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a plurality of specific effects, and the first effect control means. When the plurality of specific effects are executed by the control means, the second effect control means capable of executing a second game effect that notifies in advance that at least one of the plurality of specific effects is performed. And the second effect control means is capable of executing the second game effect in any of a plurality of notification modes having different expectation levels for performing the special game, and in the second game effect, 1 specified number of specific performances The expectation level differs between the case where the notification is performed in advance and the case where the specific effect for the second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number is performed in advance. The first specific effect and the second specific effect executed after the first specific effect can be executed, and when the first or second specific effect is executed, no special game is performed by the determination means. When it is determined that the special game is to be performed, it is easier for the operation means to change from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.

The present invention provides determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, operation means for allowing the player to perform either the first or second operation, and the determination And an effect control means for executing a game effect based on a determination result by the means, wherein the effect control means is a first effect control means capable of executing a plurality of specific effects, and the first effect control means. When the plurality of specific effects are executed by the second effect control means capable of executing a second game effect that notifies in advance that at least one of the plurality of specific effects is performed. And the second effect control means is capable of executing the second game effect in any of a plurality of notification modes having different expectation levels for performing the special game, and in the second game effect, A specific production for the number of times The degree of expectation differs between the case of notifying in advance and the case of notifying in advance that a specific effect for a second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times will be performed. The second specific effect that is executed after the specific effect and the first specific effect can be executed, and the case where the second specific effect is executed than when the first specific effect is executed. The second operation is easily required.

  Further, the present invention provides a determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player, an operation means that allows the player to perform any one of the first and second operations, And an effect control means for executing a game effect based on a determination result by the determination means, wherein the effect control means includes a first effect control means capable of executing a plurality of specific effects, and the first effect control. Second effect control means capable of executing a second game effect that notifies in advance that at least one of the plurality of specific effects is performed when the plurality of specific effects are executed by the means; And the second effect control means is capable of executing the second game effect in any of a plurality of notification modes having different expectation levels for performing the special game, and in the second game effect, Specific production for a predetermined number of times The degree of expectation is different between the case of notifying in advance and the case of notifying in advance that the second predetermined number of times that are different from the first predetermined number of times are performed. When the first specific effect and the second specific effect executed after the first specific effect can be executed, and the first or second specific effect is executed, the determination means determines that no special game is performed. The second operation is more likely to be required when it is determined that the special game is to be performed than when the special operation is performed.

  The gaming machine according to the second embodiment controls the above-mentioned game and effects of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, in particular, the execution control of the first game effect by the first variation effect control means 71a and the second variation effect control means 71c. It is possible to apply the execution control of the second game effect by the game machine of the first embodiment, the effect operating device 6 having the first and second effect buttons SW6a, 6b, the first and second movable. The accessory devices 17 and 18 are applicable.

  In the following description, the direction toward one side of the game board unit 12A shown in FIG. 47 and toward the inside of the island installed in the game arcade will be referred to as the backward direction of the gaming machine 1A. Further, the direction toward the player on the other side of the game board unit 12A is defined as the front direction of the gaming machine 1A. Also, the right direction, left direction, upward direction, and downward direction in the drawing in the rear view of the gaming board unit 12A shown in FIG. 48 are the right direction, left direction, upward direction, and downward direction of the gaming machine 1A, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment includes an outer frame 10A, a game board unit 12A, and an inner frame 14A. The outer frame 10A is directly attached to an island installed in the amusement hall. The outer frame 10A is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose vertical direction is longer than the horizontal direction. The game board unit 12A and the inner frame 14A are rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 10A in the vicinity of one vertical side of the outer frame 10A.

  47 to 49, the game board unit 12A mainly includes a base frame body 121, a game board 122, an image display device 123, a lamp relay board (not shown), and a back cover 124. Yes.

  The game board unit 12A is rotatably attached to the outer frame 10A by the base frame body 121 being rotatably attached to the outer frame 10A. The game board unit 12A is configured by assembling a game board 122, an image display device 123, a lamp relay board, a back cover 124, and the like to a base frame 121.

  Specifically, the game board 122 is attached to the front side of the base frame 121, and the image display device 123, the lamp relay board, the back cover 124, and the like are assembled to the rear side of the base frame 121.

  In the base frame 121 and the game board 122, when the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side, an opening (not shown) is formed so that a liquid crystal screen (not shown) included in the image display device 123 can be seen from the front side. ing.

  In the game board 122, a game area where game balls flow down is formed. The game board 122 is attached to the base frame 121 so that the game area faces the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side of the base frame 121. The image display device 123 is disposed so as to close the opening of the base frame 121. The lamp relay board is attached to the rear side of the base frame 121. The back cover 124 covers a part of the back surface of the image display unit including the image display device 123 and the lamp relay substrate.

  An assembly 2A described later is assembled on the rear side of the game board unit 12A. The assembly 2 </ b> A is assembled to the base frame 121 below the portion where the image display unit is covered by the back cover 124.

  As shown in FIG. 47, a fitting space 141 into which a glass plate is fitted is formed in the inner frame 14A. For this reason, when the gaming machine 1A is assembled, the gaming area set on the gaming board of the gaming board unit 12A can be viewed from the front side through the glass plate fitted in the fitting space 141. Further, an operation handle 142, an illumination lamp 143, and the like are provided on the front side of the inner frame 14A.

  The assembly 2A will be described. As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the assembly 2A includes a pedestal 20A, a substrate case 3A, and a protective cover 23A. The pedestal 20A is a component used to attach the board case 3A to the rear side of the game board unit 12A (see FIG. 49). As shown in FIG. 51, the pedestal 20A is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the left-right direction are longer than two sides along the up-down direction, and a pair of shaft portions 21A are located near both left and right ends of the lower side. And a plate-like hook 22A at the center in the left-right direction on the upper side. The shaft portion 21A has an axial direction that coincides with the left-right direction.

  The substrate case 3A is provided with a pair of hook portions 49A to be engaged with the shaft portions 21A. The pair of hook portions 49A is provided on the lower side of an outer case 45A described later. The hook portion 49A is formed in a U-shape that is convex toward the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 52, when the substrate case 3A is attached to the pedestal 20A, the substrate case 3A is arranged so that the hook portion 49A is convex toward the back side. Then, since the hook portion 49A can be engaged with the shaft portion 21A, the substrate case 3A is brought close to the pedestal 20A, and each hook portion 49A is engaged with each shaft portion 21A.

  When the hook portion 49A engages with the shaft portion 21A, the substrate case 3A is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the left side about the shaft portion 21A (in the direction indicated by the arrow C in FIG. 52). Is overlaid on the base 20A. As shown in FIG. 50, at this time, the plate-like hook 22A provided on the upper side of the pedestal 20A is caught in the recess 3Aa provided on the upper side of the substrate case 3A. Therefore, the substrate case 3A is fixed to the base 20A by the engagement between the hook portion 49A and the shaft portion 21A and the engagement between the plate-like hook 22A and the substrate case 3A.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the protective cover 23A is then attached to the substrate case 3A. The protective cover 23A covers the lower portion of the substrate case 3A including the hook portion 49A. In this way, the assembly 2A is assembled and attached to the rear side of the game board unit 12A.

  The control board 501 and the board case 3A will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, the control board 501 for controlling the game is housed in the board case 3A. Various electronic components are mounted on the control board 501. A ROM 502 is mounted on the control board 501. The ROM 502 stores storage contents used for game control. In addition, the ROM 502 stores storage contents that affect the game results.

  The substrate case 3A is a box-shaped case that accommodates the control substrate 501 and the ROM 502 so as to be visible and difficult to contact. The substrate case 3A is formed of a transmissive member such as a transparent plastic.

  The substrate case 3A includes a plurality of members 511 that contain the control substrate 501 and a cutting member 6A that cuts the sealing seal 7A. The plurality of members 511 include an inner case 40A, an outer case 45A, and a cap 8A. The inner case 40A is combined with the outer case 45A to form an inner packet portion 581 that encloses the control board 501. In FIG. 50 (c), only the ROM 502 is illustrated among the electrical components provided on the control substrate 501 included in the transparent substrate case 3A, and the other electrical components are not illustrated. (The same applies to FIGS. 53 (c) and 9 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 54, each case 40A, 45A includes a control board housing part 41A, 46A for housing the control board 501 (see FIG. 51) and a sealing base part 5A (see FIG. 55) which will be described later. Stop portions 51A and 56A are provided. The control board storage portions 41A and 46A are projected from the plate portions 42A and 47A formed in a substantially rectangular shape and the peripheral edges of the plate portions 42A and 47A, and the surface on one side of each of the plate portions 42A and 47A is provided. It is formed in a shape having surrounding flange portions 43A and 48A.

  Further, in the flange portion 43A of the control board storage portion 41A, a portion protruding from the plate portion 42A along the two long sides of the plate portion 42A (hereinafter referred to as “male portion”) has an L-shape. Three hook grooves 430 are formed in each.

  On the other hand, of the flange portion 48A of the control board housing portion 46A, the portion protruding from the plate portion 47A along the two long sides of the plate portion 47A (hereinafter referred to as “female portion”) has a double wall shape. The insertion groove portion 480 into which the male portion of the control board storage portion 41A can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. In addition, a hook piece 481 is formed in each insertion groove 480.

  When combining the control board storage parts 41A and 46A, the male part of the flange part 43A is inserted into the female part of the flange part 48A, and the control board storage parts 41A and 46A are moved in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. Slide each other. Then, since the hooking groove 430 provided in the male part engages with the hooking piece 481, the control board storage parts 41A and 46A are combined so as not to come off unless they move relative to each other in the direction opposite to the arrow α.

  When combined in this way, the control board storage parts 41A and 46A form a box-shaped inner packet part 581 that is shielded from the outside. A control board 501 (see FIG. 51) is accommodated in the inner packet part 581. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the control board 501 and the ROM 502 are exchanged illegally.

  The control board 501 is attached to the inside of the control board storage part 46A before the control board storage parts 41A and 46A are combined. At this time, an IC or the like mounted on the control board 501 is attached so as to face the plate part 47A of the control board housing part 46A. This is because the plate portion 47A is also made of transparent plastic, so that even if the control board 501 is housed in the board case 3A, electronic components such as the ROM 502 mounted on the control board 501 are illegally replaced. This is because it can be confirmed from the outside through the plate portion 47A. As shown in FIG. 48, in this embodiment, when the assembly 2A including the board case 3A is attached to the game board unit 12A, the control board 501 in the board case 3A passes through the outer case 45A from the back side of the gaming machine 1A. The mounted electronic component can be visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 54, sealing portions 51A and 56A are provided at the right end of each case 40A and 45A. As shown in FIG. 55, the case 40A, 45A is provided with a first screwing piece 91A and a second screwing piece 96A above the sealing portions 51A, 56A.

  When the control board storage portions 41A and 46A are slid and combined, the sealing base portion 5A is formed by the sealing portions 51A and 56A at the longitudinal ends of the combined sealing body 4A.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the cap 8A is attached to the sealing body 4A so as to cover the sealing base portion 5A, the first screwing piece 91A and the second screwing are provided at the end of the sealing body 4A in the longitudinal direction. In addition to the piece 96A, a third screwing piece 98A provided in the cap 8A overlaps to constitute a screwing part 9A for screwing.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the sealing portions 51A and 56A are provided so as to protrude rightward from the right end portions of the control board storage portions 41A and 46A. The sealing portions 51A and 56A have the same height in the left-right direction and the same width in the vertical direction.

  In each of the sealing portions 51A and 56A, elongated groove portions 512 and 562 are formed along the left-right direction. The sealing portion 56A is formed with two groove portions 562 parallel to each other in the left-right direction, and is separated by a predetermined distance, and the sealing portion 51A is formed with one groove portion 512 along the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 55, when the cases 40A and 45A are combined as described above, the sealing portions 51A and 56A form the sealing base portion 5A on the right side of the combined control board storage portions 41A and 46A. To do.

  In the sealing base portion 5, the sealing portions 51 and 56 are arranged in parallel at regular intervals, and an insertion / extraction space 5 a (see FIG. 55) is formed between the surfaces where the sealing portions 51 and 56 face each other. The

  As shown in FIG. 54, the sealing seal 7A is used as a means for sealing the substrate case 3A, and proves that it is a genuine product issued by an organization having authentication qualification.

  The sealing seal 7A is provided with an adhesive surface on one surface of a material that can be easily cut, such as paper, in consideration of cutability, and has a plurality of cuts. Although not shown, for example, a hologram and a QR code (registered trademark) are printed on the seal 7A. The seal seal 7A is also printed with characters “open prohibited”.

  The cutting member 6A is formed in a shape having a base portion 60A, a pair of knobs 61A, and a cutting portion 64A. The base portion 60A serving as the basis of the cutting member 6A is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cutting portion 64A is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 60A. The cutting part 64A is a part where the tip of the base part 60A is formed in a blade shape. The knob portions 61A are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base portion 60A, and are formed in a shape that is bent into a “<” shape as a whole. The left end portion of the knob portion 61A is referred to as a free end portion 61Aa.

  The cap 8A is formed in a size that covers the entire sealing base portion 5A by covering the sealing base portion 5A, and is detachable from the sealing base portion 5A.

  The cap 8A includes a box portion 80A formed in a bowl shape covering the sealing base portion 5A and a third screwing piece 98A formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the box portion 80A. On the inner side surface of the box portion 80A, when the cap 8A is attached to the sealing base portion 5A, a protrusion 82A is provided at a position where the free end portion 61Aa of the knob portion 61A of the cutting member 6A inserted into the insertion / extraction space 5Aa is caught. Is provided. Further, a groove portion 86A is formed on the inner side surface of the box portion 80A.

  The cutting member 6A is inserted into the insertion / extraction space 5Aa (see FIG. 55) of the sealing base portion 5A. Thereafter, a seal seal 7A is affixed. Furthermore, when the cap 8A is placed over the sealing base portion 5A, the groove portion 86A fits into a part of the cutting member 6A inserted into the insertion / extraction space 5Aa. Further, the protrusion 82A engages with the free end 61Aa of the knob 61A of the cutting member 6A.

  As shown in FIG. 53, as described above, when the cap 8A is placed over the sealing base portion 5A, the third screwing piece 98A becomes the first screwing piece 91A of the inner case 40A and the second screwing piece 91A of the outer case 45A. It overlaps with the combination of the screwing piece 96A to constitute a screwing part 9A for screwing. When the caulking member 30A is driven into the screw fixing portion 9A, the inner case 40A, the outer case 45A, and the cap 8A are fixed to each other.

  When unsealing the substrate case 3A, the caulking member 30A is removed and the cap 8A is removed from the sealing base portion 5A. The same applies when the sealing of the substrate case 3A is illegally released.

  The cutting member 6A and the cap 8A are integrated. For this reason, when the cap 8A is removed from the sealing base portion 5A, the cutting member 6A is also removed from the sealing base portion 5A at the same time. Then, the seal | sticker seal | sticker 7A is damaged by the cut | disconnecting part 64A etc. which cannot be recovered | restored.

  The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, the identification display 520 is attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, the inner case 40A, the outer case 45A, and the cap 8A. The identification display 520 is a display including information related to the gaming machine 1A. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the control board 501 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the ROM 502 is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the outer case 45A is referred to as an identification display 523, and the identification display 520 provided on the inner case 40A is referred to as an identification display 524. The identification display 520 provided on the cap 8A is referred to as an identification display 525.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the control board 501 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification unit for specifying the control board 501. The identification display 522 is attached to the ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification unit for specifying the ROM 502. Identification indications 523, 524, and 525 attached to the substrate case 3A are information identification units for specifying the control substrate 501. The identification display 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the inner case 40A by stamping with a mold for manufacturing the inner case 40A (see FIG. 55). The identification display 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 8A by stamping with a mold for manufacturing the cap 8A. The display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

  Identification indications 521-525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification indication 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string “ABCD01”, and the identification display 522 is a character string “ABCD02”. The identification display 523 is a character string “ABCD03”, and the identification display 524 is a character string “ABCD04”. The identification display 525 is a character string “ABCD05”. The same identification display 529 in the identification displays 521 to 525 is “ABCD”. The identification display 529 is a display corresponding to, for example, a manufacturer name and a model name. In the present embodiment, as an example, of “ABCD”, “AB” represents a manufacturer name, and “CD” represents a model name.

  In the following description, the surface forming the inner side of the substrate case 3A in the outer case 45A is referred to as an inner surface 532. In the outer case 45A, a surface forming the outside of the substrate case 3A is referred to as an outer surface 531. As shown in FIGS. 50 (c), 53 (c), and 55, a position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. The position display unit 541 is a part that displays a position to which the identification display 523 is given. The position display unit 541 is provided in a portion different from the portion overlapping the ROM 502 in the substrate case 3A. More specifically, the position display portion 541 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear side, and is provided in the lower right portion of the outer case 45A. The ROM 502 is provided on the left side of the position display unit 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display unit 541 is a recess that is recessed toward the front side.

  A transparent sticker 542 printed with an identification display 523 is affixed to the position display portion 541, whereby the position display portion 541 is attached with the identification display 523. The identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45A does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502.

  As described above, the gaming machine 1A in the present embodiment is formed. In the present embodiment, a substrate case 3A that includes the control substrate 501 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 50, 51, 53, and 55, the substrate case 3 </ b> A is provided with a position display unit 541 that is a part that displays a position to which the identification display 523 is provided. For this reason, compared with the case where the position display part 541 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the substrate case 3A. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine 1A, the manufacturer can easily grasp the position to which the identification display 520 is provided, compared to the case where the position display unit 541 is not provided. For this reason, for example, when the seal 542 is used and the identification display 523 is given by the manufacturer, the possibility that the identification display 523 is given to different positions among the plurality of gaming machines 1A can be reduced. For this reason, compared with the case where the position display part 541 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the substrate case 3A. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the position display portion 541 is a recess formed in the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3A. For this reason, for example, compared with the case where the position display unit is displayed by printing or the like on the plane of the substrate case 3A, the inspector can easily grasp the position of the position display unit 541. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the substrate case 3A. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. For this reason, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the position display unit 541 is provided in a portion different from the portion overlapping the ROM 502 in the substrate case 3A. In this case, the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display unit 541 overlaps with the ROM 502 can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can confirm both the identification display 523 and the ROM 502 at the same time. Therefore, for example, it can be easily found that the ROM 502 has been replaced by an illegal act. For this reason, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  The identification display 523 that is an information identification unit attached to the substrate case 3A and the identification display 522 that is an information identification unit attached to the ROM 502 include at least the same identification display 529. Further, the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502 is not hindered by the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45A. For this reason, the inspector can easily confirm that the cheating is not performed by confirming the ROM 502 with the same identification display 529 and the substrate case 3A. Further, for example, even when the ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraud, by determining whether the identification display 529 attached to the ROM 502 and the substrate case 3A is the same, the inspector can It is easy to confirm that fraud has occurred. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of cheating can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Also, an identification display 523 which is an information identification unit attached to the substrate case 3A, an identification display 522 which is an information identification unit attached to the ROM 502, and an identification display 521 which is an information identification unit displayed on the control board 501 Includes at least the same identification 529 (in this embodiment, the character string “ABCD”). For this reason, the inspector can easily confirm that the cheating is not performed by checking the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the board case 3A with the same identification display 529. Even when at least one of the control board 501 and the ROM 502 is replaced with another control board 501 and the ROM 502 due to fraud, the identification display 529 attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502 and the board case 3A is the same. By determining whether or not there is, the inspector can easily confirm that the illegal act has been performed. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of cheating can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made. In the following modifications, configurations corresponding to the configurations of the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Although the position display part 541 is a concave part, it is not limited to this. For example, the position display part 541 may be a convex part. 56 shows a cross section in the arrow direction at the position of the AA line shown in FIG. 53 in the outer case 45A of the substrate case 1003 according to a modification of the substrate case 3A. As shown in FIG. 56, the position display portion 541 of the substrate case 1003 is a convex portion formed on the outer surface 531 of the outer case 45A and protrudes rearward. An identification display 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal 542.

  Moreover, although the position display part 541 was provided in the outer surface 531, it is not limited to this. For example, the position display unit 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532. FIG. 57 shows a cross section in the arrow direction at the position of the AA line shown in FIG. 53 in the outer case 45A of the substrate case 1103 according to the modification of the substrate case 3A. As shown in FIG. 57, the position display portion 541 of the substrate case 1103 is a recess formed in the inner surface 532 of the substrate case 1103, and is recessed to the rear side. An identification display 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal 542. The identification display 523 is printed on the back side of the seal 542. For this reason, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 from the rear side of the substrate case 1103 through the transparent outer case 45A.

  58 shows a cross section in the arrow direction at the position of the AA line shown in FIG. 53 in the outer case 45A of the substrate case 1203 according to a modification of the substrate case 3A. As shown in FIG. 58, the position display portion 541 of the substrate case 1203 is a convex portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the substrate case 1203 and protrudes to the front side. An identification display 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal 542. The identification display 523 is printed on the back side of the seal 542. For this reason, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 from the rear side of the substrate case 1203 through the transparent outer case 45A.

  As described above, the position display portion 541 is a convex portion or a concave portion formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3A. For this reason, for example, the inspector can easily grasp the position of the identification display 520 as compared with the case where the position display unit is displayed on the plane of the substrate case 3A by printing or the like. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520 attached to the substrate case 3A. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the plurality of members 511 including the control board 501 may not include some of the outer case 45A, the inner case 40A, and the cap 8A. The plurality of members 511 may further include a member different from the outer case 45A, the inner case 40A, and the cap 8A.

  Moreover, although the identification display 520 was attached | subjected to the control board 501, ROM502, and the some member 511, it is not limited to this. For example, the related identification display 520 may be attached to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511. For example, the identification display 525 may not be attached to the cap 8A included in the plurality of members 511. Further, the identification display 524 may not be attached to the inner case 40A included in the plurality of members 511. Further, the identification display 523 may not be attached to the outer case 45 </ b> A included in the plurality of members 511. The inspector can easily confirm whether or not an illegal act is performed by checking the identification display 520 given to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511. For example, even when the control board 501 is replaced with another control board due to fraud, whether or not the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511 is related. By determining whether or not, the inspector can easily confirm that the illegal act has been performed. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of cheating can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45A, and the inner case 40A. In this case, the inspector easily confirms whether or not the cheating is performed by confirming the identification indications 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45A, and the inner case 40A. Can do. For example, even when the control board 501 is replaced with another control board by fraud, the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45A, and the inner case 40A is related. By judging whether or not, the inspector can easily confirm that the illegal act has been performed. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of cheating can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least the outer case 45A and the ROM 502. In this case, the inspector can confirm at least the identification display 520 attached to the outer case 45A and the ROM 502, and can easily confirm whether or not an illegal act is performed. For example, even when the ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to an illegal act, the inspector can easily determine whether or not at least the outer case 45A and the identification display 520 attached to the ROM 502 are related. Confirm that fraud has occurred. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of cheating can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Moreover, the identification display 520 should just be mutually related. For example, the identification display 520 may be the same identification display (for example, all “ABCD01”). Further, the identification display 520 may be a different display, and the same identification display 529 may not be included. The description content of the identification display 520 is not limited as long as it can be confirmed by the inspector. Further, the identification display 520 may not be a character string. For example, the identification display 520 may be various marks. Moreover, the aspect in which the identification display 520 is attached is not limited. For example, not only the identification display 521 but all the identification displays 521 to 525 may be printed on the sticker. Further, the seal may not be transparent. Further, all the identification indications 523 to 525 may be stamped by a mold for manufacturing the substrate case 3A.

  Further, the identification display 520 may be formed inside the material of the substrate case 3A. Hereinafter, the modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. A substrate case 1303 shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 is a modification of the substrate case 3A. In the substrate case 1303, a part where the identification display 523 is displayed is referred to as an identification display unit 1390. Further, a portion outside the identification display portion 1390 is referred to as an outer portion 1391. As shown in FIG. 60, the identification display unit 1390 protrudes rearward from the outer portion 1391. For this reason, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is larger than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391.

  The identification display 523 is formed inside a member (in this embodiment, the material of the outer case 45A) that forms the identification display portion 1390. The identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) levels 1381, 1382, 1383, 1384 in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) in the identification display unit 1390.

  A character 1371 of “A” in the identification display 523 is formed in the layer 1381. The letter “B” 1372 is formed in the hierarchy 1382. A letter “C” 1373 is formed in the hierarchy 1383. The letter “D” 1374 is formed in the hierarchy 1384. A character “1375” of “0” is formed in the hierarchy 1382. A character 1376 of “3” is formed in the hierarchy 1383.

  A method for forming the identification display 523 inside the member forming the identification display portion 1390 is not limited. For example, the identification display 523 may be formed by 3D laser engraving. The 3D laser engraving is a technique for condensing the laser and forming fine cracks of, for example, 100 microns at an interval of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm in the material of the substrate case 3. By forming a plurality of the cracks, the identification display 523 is formed inside the substrate case 3A.

  In the present embodiment, the identification display 523 is formed inside a member that forms the identification display unit 1390. For this reason, for example, the identification display 523 is less likely to be removed than when the entire identification display 523 is formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the substrate case 3A. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved. Further, when the identification display 523 is removed by fraud, a scratch is formed on the substrate case 1303. For this reason, the inspector can easily find an illegal act. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, the identification display 523 is provided by being divided into a plurality of levels 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1390. For this reason, the identification display 523 is less likely to be removed than when the identification display 523 is formed only in one layer. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, in the substrate case 1303, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is larger than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. In this case, it is necessary to sharpen the substrate case 3A more deeply when an unauthorized person tries to remove the identification display 520, as compared with the case where L1 is equal to or less than L2. For this reason, the substrate case 1303 is easily damaged. For this reason, the inspector can easily find an illegal act. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Note that the identification display 523 may not be divided into the plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display unit 1390. For example, the identification display 523 may be formed only in one layer. Further, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 may be equal to or less than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. Further, although the identification display 523 has been described, the identification displays 520 provided on the substrate case 1303 such as the identification displays 524 and 525 may also be formed inside the substrate case 1303.

  In the above embodiment, the substrate cases 3A, 1003, 1103, and 1303 are examples of the “housing portion” of the present invention. The identification display 523 is an example of the “first identification unit” in the present invention. The identification display 522 is an example of the “second identification unit” in the present invention. The identification display 521 is an example of the “third identification unit” in the present invention. The identification display 529 is an example of the “identification display” in the present invention.

<Embodiment A>
[Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 2301]
A schematic configuration of the gaming machine 2301 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 2301 of the present embodiment. The gaming machine 2301 is configured to fire a game ball based on a player's launch operation, and when a game ball wins a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the win. It is a pachinko machine. Note that the gaming machine 2301 of this embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 type.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the gaming machine 2301 is provided with a gaming board 2310 provided with a prize or a combination related to determination, and a frame member 2311 surrounding the gaming board 2310. The detailed configuration of the game board 2310 is not shown (blank) in FIG. 61, and will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The frame member 2311 is a so-called glass frame that supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the board surface of the game board 2310 at a predetermined interval. A game area 2312 in which a game ball can flow down is formed by the glass plate supported by the frame member 2311 and the game board 2310.

  The frame member 2311 has a frame lamp 2313 that emits light for production or the like in the upper center. Speakers 2314 are provided on the left and right sides of the frame lamp 2313. In addition, the frame member 2311 has a configuration in which a lower portion protrudes toward the player side, and a circular effect button 2315 is provided on the upper surface of the protruding portion. An effect key 2316 including four push buttons is provided on the left side of the effect button 2315. Further, on the back side of the effect button 2315, a dish 2317 for guiding the game ball to a launching device (not shown) is provided. The frame member 2311 has a handle 2318 at the lower right side. A lever 2319 is rotatably attached to the handle 2318. In addition, the handle 2318 is provided with a stop button 2320 for temporarily stopping the launch of the game ball regardless of the rotation of the lever 2319.

  62, a specific configuration of the game board 2310 arranged at a substantially central portion in the gaming machine 2301 will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, the game board 2310 is configured by arranging game nails and various accessories on a plate-like plate member 2400, and has a liquid crystal display device 2401 in the center thereof. Further, the game board 2310 includes a first starting device 2402, a second starting device 2403, an electric tulip 2404, two gates 2405, a big winning device 2406, four general winning devices 2407, A display 2408 is provided as display means.

  In addition to the display 2408, a sub-display 2420 may be provided as a display means in the game area 2312. For example, the sub-display 2420 may be arranged below the game ball guiding member 2419 arranged along the inner rail 2410b on the right side in the game area 2312.

  The game board 2310 includes a first central movable accessory 2411, a second central movable accessory 2412, a lower right movable accessory 2413, a lower left movable accessory 2414 as a movable (electric) accessory (gimmick) for production. It has a right middle movable accessory 2415, a left middle movable accessory 2416, an upper right movable accessory 2417, and a left upper movable accessory 2418. Each of these movable accessories 2411 to 2418 is individually driven by a stepping motor. Further, the driving of each movable accessory 2411 to 2418 by the stepping motor is controlled by a lamp control board 2540 (see FIG. 63), as will be described later.

  The first starter 2402 is provided in the left and right center of the game board 2310 below the liquid crystal display device 2401. A second starter 2403 is provided below the first starter 2402. In addition, an electric tulip 2404 as a normal electric accessory is provided in the vicinity of the second starting device 2403. One gate 2405 is provided at each of the lower right side and upper left side of the game board 2310. A big winning device 2406 is provided on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 2401. Three of the four general winning devices 2407 are provided in the lower left portion of the game board 2310, and the remaining one is provided in the lower right portion of the game board 2310. A discharge device 2409 for discharging game balls that have not won a prize is provided at the bottom of the game board 2310.

  61 and 62, when the player holds the handle 2318 and rotates the lever 2319 in the clockwise direction, the game balls stored in the plate 2317 are guided to the launching device (not shown). The ball is fired toward the game area 2312 with a hitting force corresponding to the rotation angle of the lever 2319. The game ball launched by the launching device rises between the outer rail 2410a and the inner rail 2410b provided on the left end side of the game board 2310, and eventually reaches the upper part in the game area 2312. The game ball that has reached the upper part in the game area 2312 then falls in the game area 2312. At this time, the game ball falls on the board of the game board 2310 while changing its moving direction by making contact with a plurality of nails or windmills provided in the game area 2312 (unpredictably). As described above, the launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 2320.

  When a player launches a game ball by rotating the lever 2319, when the player makes a so-called “left-handed” operation in which the lever 2319 of the handle 2318 is rotated at a small rotation angle, It is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 2312 as illustrated by the wavy arrow A in FIG. On the other hand, when the player performs so-called “right strike” in which the lever 2319 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down in the right area in the game area 2312 as illustrated by the wavy arrow B in FIG. Therefore, “right-handed” is required to win the right gate 2405 and the big winning device 2406.

  The first starter 2402 is a starter that is always open. The first starter 2402 is provided with a first start port detection switch 2504 (see FIG. 63) that detects the entry of a game ball. When the first start port detection switch 2504 detects that a game ball has entered and wins a prize, it is determined whether or not a big hit game advantageous to the player is executed, and the result of the determination is displayed on the display 2408 (or sub-display). A predetermined prize ball (for example, three game balls) is paid out while being displayed on the display 2420).

  The second starter 2403 is a starter that is opened only when the electric tulip 2404 is operating. The second starter 2403 is provided with a second start port detection switch 2505 (see FIG. 63) that detects the entry of a game ball. When the second starting port detection switch 2505 detects that a game ball has entered and wins a prize, it is determined whether or not a big hit game advantageous to the player is executed, as in the case of the first starting device 2402. The determination result is displayed on the display 2408 (or the sub-display 2420), and a predetermined prize ball (for example, three game balls) is paid out.

  In the following description, the determination executed on the condition of winning the first starter 2402 is referred to as “first special symbol determination”, and the determination executed on the condition of winning the second starter 2403. This is referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination”.

  The special winning device 2406 is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the big prize device 2406 is provided at the opening of the big prize device 2406. The big winning device 2406 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined big hit symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big hit” is stopped and displayed on the display 2408 (or the sub-display 2420), that is, when a big hit occurs, A big hit game is executed in which the plate is operated to open the big prize device 2406. For this reason, the player can obtain more prize balls by making a right hit during the jackpot game compared to when the jackpot game is not being played.

  The electric tulip 2404 is disposed in the vicinity of the second starter 2403 and has one plate for closing or opening an opening into which a game ball enters the second starter 2403. The electric tulip 2404 can change its posture between an open posture in which the plate opens the opening of the second starting device 2403 (see FIG. 62) and a closed posture (not shown) in which the opening of the second starting device 2403 is closed. It is configured.

  The second starter 2403 is normally closed by an electric tulip 2404. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 2405, it is determined whether or not the second starter 2403 is to be opened, although no prize ball is paid out. Here, when it is determined that the second starting device 2403 is to be opened, the operation of returning the closed position after the plate of the electric tulip 2404 has been maintained for a specified time is repeated a specified number of times. As described above, the second starting device 2403 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the electric tulip 2404 is not operated (that is, when the plate is in the closed position), whereas the electric tulip 2404 is operated. When this is done (that is, when the plate is in the open position), the game ball easily passes. In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the gate 2405 is referred to as “ordinary symbol determination”.

  The four general winning devices 2407 are always open like the first starting device 2402, and are a winning device having a predetermined number of winning balls by winning a game ball. Unlike the first starting device 2402, etc., even if a game ball wins the general winning device 2407, no determination is made.

  Each movable combination 2411 to 2418 as a gimmick for performance is a combination that is driven in order to give the player various expectations, and each has a predetermined driving pattern according to the progress of the game. It is driven by. FIG. 62 shows a state in which each movable accessory 2411 to 2418 is located at an initial position before the start of driving.

  The first central movable accessory 2411 is driven upward from the initial position shown in FIG. 62 at a predetermined drive timing. The second central movable accessory 2412 is driven downward from the initial position shown in FIG. 62 at a predetermined drive timing.

  The lower right movable accessory 2413 is driven leftward from the initial position shown in FIG. 62 at a predetermined drive timing. The lower left movable accessory 2414 is driven rightward from the initial position shown in FIG. 62 at a predetermined drive timing.

  The right middle movable accessory 2415 is driven leftward from the initial position shown in FIG. 62 at a predetermined drive timing. The left middle movable accessory 2416 is driven rightward from the initial position shown in FIG. 62 at a predetermined drive timing.

  The upper right movable accessory 2417 is driven from the initial position shown in FIG. 62 diagonally downward to the left at a predetermined drive timing. The upper left movable accessory 2418 is driven from the initial position shown in FIG. 62 diagonally downward to the right at a predetermined drive timing.

[Overview of Display 2408 and Sub Display 2420]
78 is an example of a front view of the display 2408. FIG. In the present embodiment, the display 2408 is disposed adjacent to the outer rail 2410a at the lower left of the game area 2312, but is not limited to this and can be disposed at various positions.

  The display 2408 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination (in other words, information related to profits given to the player in the game). More specifically, the display 2408 includes the first and second special symbol displays 4000 and 4010, the first and second special symbol hold displays 4001 and 4011, the probability variation display 4020, the time reduction display 4021, and the right-handed display. 4022, a jackpot round number display 4030, a normal symbol display 4040, and a normal symbol hold display 4041. Details of these indicators will be described later.

  The sub-display 2420 also displays information related to the benefits given to the player in the game. Similarly, the first and second special symbol displays and the first and second special symbol hold displays are displayed. It can be configured as a display unit, a probability change display, a time reduction display, a right-handed display, a jackpot round number display, a normal symbol display, and a normal symbol hold display.

  If both the display device 2408 and the sub-display device 2420 are mounted, each of the functions as the display devices 4000 to 4041 described above is assigned to either the display device 2408 or the sub-display device 2420. If one of the display 2408 or the sub-display 2420 is mounted, the mounted display 2408 or the sub-display 2420 has all the functions as the above-described displays 4000 to 4041. .

[Details of Display 2408]
As shown in FIG. 78, the display 2408 has a plurality of LEDs 4045 arranged in two rows. When displaying information related to the profits given to the player by the game using only the display 2408, these LEDs 4045 are displayed on the first and second special symbol displays 4000 and 4010 and the first and second special symbol hold. The display units 4001 and 4011, the probability change display unit 4020, the time reduction display unit 4021, the right-handed display unit 4022, the jackpot round number display unit 4030, the normal symbol display unit 4040, and the normal symbol hold display unit 4041 are configured. The LEDs 4045 are arranged in two rows in parallel along the launch path of the game balls formed by the rails 2410a and 2410b (see FIG. 62). Note that the arrangement of the LEDs 4045 is not limited to this, and each LED 4045 may be arranged in one row along the launch path of the game balls, or may be arranged in three or more rows. They may be arranged regardless of the passage.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the display 2408 includes a display substrate 4200 on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are surface-mounted, a cover member 4202 that covers at least the front side of the display substrate 4200, and the display substrate 4200. And a protective member 4204 disposed on the side. The display 2408 is installed in a standing posture so that the display substrate 4200 disposed between the cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 is along the board surface of the game board 2310. The display 2408 is configured to be difficult or inaccessible from the outside to the display substrate 4200 by the cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The display 2408 is attached to the plate member 2400 by fitting into an attachment opening (not shown) formed in the plate member 2400 constituting the game board 2310, and the front side faces the front side of the game board 2310. The light from the LED 4045 is visible. In addition, the display 2408 has a rear surface facing the back side of the game board 2310 (plate member 2400), and an access is made from the back side of the game board 2310 to a connector 4100 (FIG. 79) which is provided to face the back side. It is possible.

  The display 2408 is attached to the game board 2310 by fixing the cover member 4202 or the protection member 4204 constituting the outer shell of the display 2408 by screwing, bonding, or other methods. Here, the display 2408 is configured such that it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or leave a trace on either the display 2408 or the game board 2310 with respect to the game board 2310 due to adhesion or the like. It may be attached. In other words, the attachment structure of the display 2408 and the game board 2310 is a structure that is difficult to remove without destroying the game board 2310 or the display 2408, and the game board 2310 or the display 2408 is destroyed or deformed by the removal. Thus, at least one of the configurations that cannot be assembled as in the original configuration, and that the game board 2310 or the display 2408 is destroyed or deformed by the removal, so that the game board 2310 or the display 2408 leaves a trace of removal. It may be.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the display substrate 4200 is a printed circuit board in which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are provided on the front surface that faces the player, and light can be emitted from each LED 4045 toward the front side. . The LED 4045 is mounted on the surface of the display substrate 4200 instead of through-hole mounting for fixing the lead of the LED 4045 to the hole in the printed circuit board. In the display substrate 4200, the light emitting element of the LED 4045 and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the display substrate 4200 are on the same front surface of the display substrate 4200. In other words, the display substrate 4200 has no rear surface projecting leads for connecting the LED 4045 to the circuit, and no solder for fixing the LED 4045 is disposed on the rear surface. In the present embodiment, a plurality of LEDs 4045 are arranged in two upper and lower rows in the upper region of the display substrate 4200. As the LED 4045, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. As the LED 4045, a chip type or a shell type can be used as long as it can be mounted on the surface, but a chip type is desirable from the advantage of reducing space. The display board 4200 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are turned on, off, blinking, or the like under the control of a control means such as a main control board 2500 (FIG. 63: this embodiment) or an effect control board 2520 (FIG. 63) described later. Is controlled, and information on profits given to the player is displayed according to the state of lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc., and combinations and state changes thereof.

  Thus, by mounting the LED 4045 on the display substrate 4200, the space for disposing the LED 4045 on the display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. Further, by surface-mounting the LED 4045 on the display substrate 4200, the weight can be reduced and the failure can be reduced. Further, by mounting the LED 4045 on the front surface of the display substrate 4200, the mounting of the LED 4045 does not affect the rear surface of the display substrate 4200 like through-hole mounting. Therefore, the display substrate 4200 can arrange other electronic components on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the display substrate 4200 can be used effectively. The display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.

  The LED 4045 has either a configuration in which the light emitting element is disposed so as to protrude from the surface of the display substrate 4200 (FIG. 80: this embodiment) or a configuration in which the LED 4045 is embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the display substrate 4200. Also good. The display substrate 4200 may be provided with a reflective portion that easily reflects white light or the like in the front region where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted, or an absorbing portion that hardly reflects light such as black in the front region. May be provided. In the case where the light emitting element of the LED 4045 protrudes from the surface of the display substrate 4200, by providing a reflective portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be reflected by the reflective portion and used efficiently. In addition, in the case where the light emitting element of the LED 4045 is embedded in the display substrate 4200, an absorption part is provided around the light emitting element to prevent light emitted from the LED 4045 from being diffused by the absorption part on the front surface of the display substrate 4200. can do.

  FIG. 83 is a front view of the display substrate 4200 as viewed from the front side when displaying only information related to the profits given to the player in the game by the display 2408 alone. The first special symbol indicator 4000 is composed of six LEDs 4045 on the right side of the upper row, and the second special symbol indicator 4010 is composed of six LEDs 4045 in the upper row. The first special symbol hold indicator 4001 is composed of two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol indicator 4000 and the second special symbol indicator 4010, and the second special symbol hold indicator 4011 is It consists of two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol display 4010. On the right side of the second special symbol holding display 4011, the probability variation display 4020, the time-shortening display 4021, and the right-handed display 4022 are arranged one by one in this order. The big hit round number indicator 4030 is composed of eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row, the normal symbol indicator 4040 is constituted by three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the big hit round number indicator 4030, and the normal symbol holding indicator 4041 is , Composed of two LEDs 4045 from the right side of the lower row. In addition, the structure of the display units 4000, 4001, 4010, 4011, 4020, 4021, 4022, 4030, 4040, 4041 by a plurality of LEDs 4045 is not limited to this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the display substrate 4200 is provided with a connector 4100 on the rear surface opposite to the surface on which the LED 4045 is mounted, and a display is provided via a harness (not shown) connected to the connector 4100. The device 2408 (LED 4045) and the main control board 2500 are electrically connected. The connector 4100 is a so-called jack in which a plug provided at the end of the harness is detachable, and may be in a male terminal shape or a female terminal shape. The connector 4100 may be through-hole mounting in which the lead of the connector 4100 is fixed to the hole of the printed board. In this embodiment, the connector 4100 is surface-mounted on the rear surface of the display board 4200. Further, in the connector 4100, the connector opening into which the plug provided at the end of the harness is inserted opens in the rear (this embodiment) or in the vertical and horizontal directions. Thus, the main body of the connector 4100 and the solder for fixing the connector 4100 to the display substrate 4200 are on the same rear surface of the display substrate 4200. That is, the display substrate 4200 does not protrude from the front surface of the lead for connecting the connector 4100 to the circuit, and the solder for fixing the connector 4100 is not disposed on the front surface. In this manner, by mounting the connector 4100 on the display substrate 4200, the arrangement space of the connector 4100 on the display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.

  The connector 4100 is disposed on the rear surface of the display substrate 4200 at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the display substrate 4200. That is, the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the connector 4100 overlap with the display substrate 4200 sandwiched between the front and back sides. As described above, by mounting the connector 4100 on the rear surface of the display substrate 4200, the mounting of the connector 4100 does not affect the front surface of the display substrate 4200 as in the case of through hole mounting. Therefore, the display substrate 4200 can arrange the connector 4100 on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface. The substrate 4200 can be made more compact.

  As shown in FIG. 84, a resistor 4500 as current limiting means is mounted on the rear surface of the display substrate 4200. In the present embodiment, the plurality of resistors 4500 are arranged side by side at positions that do not overlap the connector 4100. . The resistor 4500 may be through-hole mounting in which the lead of the resistor 4500 is fixed to the hole of the printed circuit board, but in this embodiment, is mounted on the surface of the display substrate 4200. In the display substrate 4200, the resistor 4500 and the solder for fixing the resistor 4500 to the display substrate 4200 are on the same rear surface of the display substrate 4200. That is, the display substrate 4200 has no lead protruding from the front surface thereof for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit, and no solder for fixing the resistor 4500 is disposed on the front surface. In the present embodiment, a plurality of resistors 4500 are arranged in the upper region of the display substrate 4200. As shown in FIG. 86, the resistor 4500 is disposed between the connector 4100 and the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the circuit of the display substrate 4200, and restricts the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to be a predetermined value or less. The excessive current is prevented from flowing through each LED 4045.

  In this manner, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the display substrate 4200, even if the resistor 4045 fails, it can be dealt with by replacing the display 2408, and maintenance is facilitated. Since the display 2408 can be easily replaced, it is possible to shorten the game pause period and to avoid losing the fun of the game. Further, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the display substrate 4200, the space for arranging the resistor 4500 in the display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.

  The resistor 4500 may be disposed on the rear surface of the display substrate 4200 at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the front surface of the display substrate 4200. In this case, the mounting region of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting region of the plurality of resistors 4500 may have either a configuration in which all overlap or a part in which the display substrate 4200 is sandwiched in front and back. Thus, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the rear surface of the display substrate 4200, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the display substrate 4200 like through-hole mounting. Accordingly, the display substrate 4200 can arrange the resistor 4500 on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the display substrate 4200 can effectively display the front and rear surfaces of the display substrate 4200. The substrate 4200 can be made more compact. Note that the mounting region of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting region of the plurality of resistors 4500 may not overlap each other with the display substrate 4200 sandwiched between the front and back surfaces.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the cover member 4202 includes a front cover portion 4208 in which windows 4206 corresponding to the respective LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the display substrate 4200 are formed, and a peripheral edge of the front cover portion 4208. And a horizontal cover portion 4210 formed so as to rise to the rear side. The cover member 4202 is formed in a box shape opened rearward by the front cover portion 4208 and the lateral cover portion 4210, and the display substrate 4200 is accommodated in an inner region surrounded by the front cover portion 4208 and the lateral cover portion 4210. It is possible. When the display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region of the cover member 4202, the display substrate 4200 is positioned closer to the front cover portion 4208 (front side) than the open end (rear end) of the horizontal cover portion 4210. The entire display substrate 4200 is accommodated in the inner region of the cover member 4202. In other words, the cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the display substrate 4200 on which the LED 4045 is mounted with the front cover portion 4208, covers the peripheral surface of the display substrate 4200 with the horizontal cover portion 4210, and displays due to the presence of the cover member 4202. It is difficult to access the front surface and the peripheral surface of the circuit board 4200 from the outside. In the cover member 4202 of this embodiment, the inner region is formed to match a part of the outer edge of the display substrate 4200, and when the display substrate 4200 is accommodated in the inner region, the display substrate 4200 is formed on the inner surface of the horizontal cover portion 4210. The display substrate 4200 can be held so as not to be misaligned.

  As described above, the display substrate 4200 is disposed in a state of being accommodated in the cover member 4202, so that it is difficult to access the display substrate 4200 from the front side or the lateral side, and illegal acts on the display substrate 4200 are prevented. can do. Further, even if it is attempted to remove the display substrate 4200, it is difficult to remove the display substrate 4200 from the cover member 4202 because it is difficult to access the display substrate 4200 as described above.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 85, the cover member 4202 has a window 4206 penetrating the front cover portion 4208 in the front-rear direction corresponding to the LED 4045 by a window defining portion 4212 formed in the front cover portion 4208. Has been. The window 4206 may be provided corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 4045 (this embodiment), or may be provided so as to correspond to two or more predetermined number of LEDs 4045 among the plurality of LEDs 4045. The window 4206 has a polygonal shape such as a quadrangle (this embodiment), a circular shape, or the like, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the corresponding LED 4045 so that the corresponding one or more LEDs 4045 are entirely inside. Yes. In the cover member 4202, the windows 4206 are formed in two rows. When the cover member 4202 is disposed in a state where the front side of the display substrate 4200 is covered, the windows 4206 are disposed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 4045. Thus, the lighting state of each LED 4045 facing each window 4206 can be visually recognized through the window 4206.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 85, the cover member 4202 penetrates the front cover portion 4208 in the front-rear direction and defines a window 4206 formed corresponding to the LED 4045, and the state of the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 is changed to the window 4206. The window defining unit 4212 is configured to be distinguishable every time. The window defining part 4212 is formed in a cylindrical shape projecting rearward from the front cover part 4208 (this embodiment), and a part corresponding to the front side of the mounting area of the LED 4045 in the front cover part 4208 is thickly formed. It is provided depending on the configuration. In the case where the window defining portion 4212 is formed of a cylindrical body, the window defining portions 4212 may be separated from each other and independent, or a part of the adjacent window defining portions 4212 may be integrated. . Between the front side opening of the window 4206 facing the front side and the rear side opening of the window 4206 facing the corresponding LED 4045, the window defining part 4212 is, for example, somewhat longer than the plate thickness of the lateral cover part 4210 and the display substrate 4200. A distance is provided, and the window defining unit 4212 functions as a light guide unit that guides light emitted from the LED 4045 and prevents light from diffusing. In other words, the window 4206 may be configured such that a gap is formed between the front cover portion 4208 and the front surface of the display substrate 4200, or a portion corresponding to the LED 4045 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 is projected to the front side. By the window defining part 4212 that defines the light, the light of the LED 4045 can be guided to the front side without any leakage.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the cover member 4202 is combined with the display substrate 4200 so that the window defining portion 4212 faces the front surface of the display substrate 4200, and all the LEDs 4045 mounted on the front surface of the display substrate 4200 are mounted. The perimeter is individually enclosed by the window defining unit 4212. In the present embodiment, the rear end of the window defining portion 4212 formed in a cylindrical shape is in contact with the front surface of the display substrate 4200, and the adjacent LED 4045 is partitioned by the window defining portion 4212. Note that the cover member 4202 and the display substrate 4200 are formed such that the window defining portion 4212 of the cover member 4202 and the front surface of the display substrate 4200 are in contact with each other, and the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208 and the surface of the display substrate 4200 are in contact with each other. It is basically configured so that there is a gap between them. Thus, since the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 is surrounded by the window defining unit 4212 that defines the window 4206, the light emitted from the LED 4045 does not diffuse and the state of the LED 4045 through the window 4206 is not diffused. Can be more easily identified. In addition, since the rear end of the window defining portion 4212 is in contact with the front surface of the display substrate 4200 and blocks the gap between the front cover portion 4208 and the display substrate 4200, light leaks from the gap to the next window 4206. This can be prevented, and the state of the LED 4045 can be clearly distinguished. In addition, even if an unauthorized tool is intruded through the window 4206, the unauthorized tool can be blocked only by the window forming unit 4212 in the window 4206, and the illegal act can be prevented more appropriately. Note that the window defining unit 4212 may face the rear end (rear surface) and the front surface of the display substrate 4200 so as to have a slight gap.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the cover member 4202 includes a protruding alignment portion 4600 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208. The alignment portion 4600 is formed integrally with the window defining portion 4212 so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion 4212 facing the front surface of the display substrate 4200. The alignment portion 4600 is configured to fit into the substrate hole 4400 (FIG. 83) formed in the display substrate 4200 so that the display substrate 4200 can be aligned with the cover member 4202. The cover member 4202 is provided with a plurality of alignment portions 4600 that are spaced apart from each other on the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208. Among the plurality of alignment portions 4600, there may be one formed apart from the window defining portion 4212. Each alignment portion 4600 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The alignment portion 4600 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion 4212, but its rear end is positioned in front of the rear end of the horizontal cover portion 4210 and is housed inside the cover member 4202.

  The display substrate 4200 includes a substrate hole 4400 formed so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction, and the substrate hole 4400 is also formed in a circle in accordance with the columnar alignment portion 4600. The substrate hole 4400 is set to have the same or slightly larger opening size as the outer shape of the alignment portion 4600. The alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are provided so as to correspond in number, position, and the like. The alignment portion 4600 is fitted into the substrate hole 4400, and the display substrate 4200 is relatively positioned in the inner region of the cover member 4202. Is defined. Therefore, the cover member 4202 and the display substrate 4200 are assembled in a state where they are positioned vertically and horizontally with each other by fitting the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400.

  As described above, the cover member 4202 and the display substrate 4200 are assembled in a state of being positioned with each other by fitting the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400, so that the LED 4045 and the window 4206 corresponding thereto are arranged. Alignment can be performed without deviation, and the state of the LED 4045 can be identified more suitably. Further, since the alignment unit 4600 is formed integrally with the window defining unit 4212 and is reinforced by the window defining unit 4212, the alignment unit 4600 may be configured to protrude rearward from the window defining unit 4212. Can be avoided. By forming the alignment portion 4600 integrally with the window defining portion 4212, the projecting dimension can be shortened, and breakage or deformation of the alignment portion 4600 can be more preferably avoided.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the display substrate 4200 includes a plurality of substrate holes 4400 formed so as to sandwich the connector 4100 therebetween. The cover member 4202 is provided with an alignment portion 4600 corresponding to each of the plurality of substrate holes 4400 so as to sandwich the connector 4100 mounted on the display substrate 4200. More specifically, the display substrate 4200 has a pair of substrate holes 4400 arranged in a symmetrical positional relationship with the connector 4100 sandwiched in the left and right (this embodiment), up and down, or diagonal directions. A pair of alignment portions 4600 are provided in the cover member 4202 corresponding to each of the substrate holes 4400 formed. As described above, the display 2408 has an alignment structure formed by the alignment portion 4600 and the board hole 4400 into which the alignment portion 4600 fits in not only in a region on one side of the connector 4100 but in regions on both sides sandwiching the connector 4100. They are distributed.

  In the display device 2408, an alignment structure of the cover member 4202 and the display substrate 4200 by the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 into which the alignment portion 4600 is fitted is provided in a distributed manner on both sides of the connector 4100. The connector 4100 is a portion to which a force is applied when the plug of the harness is attached / detached, but the display substrate 4200 can be prevented from being displaced by the alignment structure arranged with the connector 4100 interposed therebetween.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the protection member 4204 has a plate shape, and a connector opening 4300 penetrating in the front and back direction is formed in accordance with the connector 4100 protruding from the rear surface of the display substrate 4200. The connector opening 4300 is formed according to the outer shape of the connector 4100 so that there is no large gap between the connector opening 4300 and the connector 4100 passed through the connector opening 4300. The protection member 4204 covers at least a part of the rear surface of the display substrate 4200 housed in the cover member 4202 so that it is difficult to access the rear surface of the display substrate 4200 from the outside. Alternatively, the display substrate 4200 is attached. The protective member 4204 is disposed so as to fit inside the cover member 4202, and is disposed on the rear side of the display substrate 4200 housed inside the cover member 4202. The protection member 4204 of this embodiment is formed in an outer shape that matches the inner region of the cover member 4202 defined by the lateral cover portion 4210. When the protective member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the cover member 4202, the peripheral surface of the protective member 4204 is in contact with the inner surface of the lateral cover portion 4210, and the protective member 4204 is held so as not to be displaced vertically and horizontally. When the protective member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the cover member 4202, the position where the rear surface of the protective member 4204 is aligned with the open end (rear end) of the lateral cover portion 4210 or the front cover portion 4208 side of the open end. The entire protective member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the cover member 4202.

  As described above, since the rear side of the display substrate 4200 is covered with the protective member 4204, it is difficult to access the display substrate 4200 from the rear, and an illegal act on the display substrate 4200 can be prevented. Further, the presence of the protective member 4204 makes it difficult to remove the display substrate 4200 from the cover member 4202. Here, since the protection member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the cover member 4202, it is difficult to remove the protection member 4204 itself by being obstructed by the cover member 4202.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are assembled with a concave and convex fitting structure. It is configured such that a trace of removal remains on any of the members 4204. The fitting structure is such that a claw-like engaging portion 4214 provided on one of the cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 (the protection member 4204 in this embodiment) is connected to the other of the cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 (this embodiment). In the embodiment, the cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are integrated by engaging with the engagement receiving portion 4216 provided on the cover member 4202) and being caught by the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216. The fitting structure is provided at a plurality of locations corresponding to the cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204, and the cover structure 4202 and the protection member 4204 are provided in a distributed manner on opposite sides of the display substrate 4200. .

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the cover member 4202 is provided with an engagement receiving portion 4216 in the lateral cover portion 4210. The engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided on the open end side of the lateral cover portion 4210 so as to form an opening edge on the rear side of the engagement opening formed so as to penetrate the lateral cover portion 4210. The lateral cover part 4210 is formed in a concave shape with the front part opened outward from the engagement opening to have a thin plate thickness, and an engagement receiving part 4216 is constructed over the opening side of the concave part. That is, in the present embodiment, the engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided with a plate thickness that is thinner than the plate thickness of the lateral cover portion 4210 so that the inside is recessed, and the engagement portion 4214 is easily fitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the protective member 4204 is provided with an engaging portion 4214 that protrudes from the outer edge along the plate surface of the protective member 4204. The width of the engagement portion 4214 and the width of the engagement receiving portion 4216 (engagement opening) are set substantially the same, and the thickness in the front-rear direction of the engagement portion 4214 and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the engagement opening are When the engagement portion 4214 is fitted to the engagement receiving portion 4216, the engagement portion 4214 hits the opening edge of the engagement opening and is positioned. The engaging portion 4214 has an inclined surface such as an arc shape or a flat surface that is inclined backward as the front surface approaches the protruding end, and the rear surface is a flat surface along the rear surface of the protection member 4204. In other words, the engaging portion 4214 extends so that the front surface obliquely intersects with the engagement receiving portion 4216, and the rear surface intersects with the engagement receiving portion 4216 in an orthogonal or nearly orthogonal relationship. It is extended. Accordingly, when the engaging portion 4214 is fitted into the engaging receiving portion 4216, the cover member 4202 is elastically deformed so as to be spread by the inclination of the front surface of the engaging portion 4214 that contacts the engaging receiving portion 4216, and the engaging receiving portion The engagement portion 4214 can be easily fitted into the engagement opening over the 4216. When the engaging portion 4214 fits into the engaging opening, the engaging portion 4214 is caught by the engaging receiving portion 4216 and the rearward movement of the engaging portion 4214 is prevented. Here, when the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216 are fitted, the rear surface of the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216 are hooked to face each other, so that the engaging portion 4214 is engaged. Is not guided so that the cover member 4202 is pushed and spread by the engaging portion 4214 as in the case of fitting to the engaging receiving portion 4216. Therefore, the protection member 4204 cannot be substantially detached from the cover member 4202 by fitting the engagement portion 4214 into the engagement receiving portion 4216.

  Thus, according to the fitting structure of the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216, it is difficult to remove the protection member 4204 from the cover member 4202, and the display substrate 4200 is protected by the protection member 4204. Unauthorized acts on the display substrate 4200 can be prevented. In addition, when the engagement portion 4214 or the engagement receiving portion 4216 is destroyed and the protection member 4204 is forcibly removed from the cover member 4202, a trace of the destruction of the engagement reception portion 4216 remains on the cover member 4202, and the protection member 4204 remains. The trace which destroyed the engaging part 4214 remains in 4204, and it becomes easy to discover that there was a fraudulent act. Furthermore, when the protective member 4204 is forcibly removed from the cover member 4202, the protective member 4204 cannot be attached to the cover member 4202 again because at least one of the engaging portion 4214 or the engaging receiving portion 4216 is broken. It becomes difficult to reassemble.

  The display 2408 of this embodiment is configured such that the cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 are difficult to remove, reassemble, and leave a trace of removal. As a result, the display substrate 4200 placed between the cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 is substantially difficult to remove from the cover member 4202, difficult to reassemble with respect to the cover member 4202, and to the cover member 4202. A trace of removal remains. With such a configuration, an illegal act on the display substrate 4200 can be prevented, and even if there is an illegal act, it can be easily detected.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, an identification unit 4220 that can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 4045 individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045 is arranged on the front side of the cover member 4202. The identification means 4220 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is provided around the transmissive part 4222 as a first region that can transmit light or affects the transmitted light, and is provided around the transmissive part 4222. Is also provided with a shielding portion 4224 as a second region that hardly transmits light. Moreover, the identification means 4220 may be provided with the combination area | region 4226 (FIG. 78) which is displayed on the shielding part 4224 and shows the light emission mode of two or more LED4045 as a combination. The identification unit 4220 of this embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the cover member 4202. The identification means 4220 is preferably formed in a shape that matches the front surface area of the cover member 4202 where the window 4206 opens. In this embodiment, the identification means 4220 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the cover member 4202. In this embodiment, the identification unit 4220 and the cover member 4202 are bonded, but the size of the identification unit 4220 and the method of attaching to the cover member 4202 are not limited thereto.

  The transmissive portion 4222 of the present embodiment is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the cover member 4202, and the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be transmitted and affects the transmitted light. ing. The transmissive portion 4222 is provided so as to cover the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the transmissive portion 4222 on the front side of the window 4206 prevents the LED 4045 disposed on the opening of the window 4206 and the inside of the window 4206 from being directly visible from the front side. It is. Here, “influence on light” means, for example, an aspect that makes the LED 4045 difficult to visually recognize by being translucent, an aspect that colors the light emitted from the LED 4045 by being colored, A mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is diffused and the light emitted from the LED 4045 is converged and a mode in which the light is emitted from the LED 4045 is combined, or a mode in which these are combined. Light is diffused by the transmission part 4222. The transmission part 4222 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the cover member 4202, and is arranged in accordance with the plurality of windows 4206 provided in the cover member 4202, and the plurality of transmission parts 4222 are provided in the identification unit 4220. ing. That is, the identification means 4220 is formed with a transmission part 4222 having a square shape matching the window 4206 and the same size as the window 4206, and the transmission part 4222 closes the front opening of the window 4206.

  As described above, since the front side of the window 4206 is blocked by the transmission portion 4222, it is possible to make it difficult to access the LED 4045 mounted on the surface of the display substrate 4200 from the front side of the display 2408. That is, it is possible to prevent the transmission part 4222 from performing an illegal act on the display substrate 4200 through the window 4206 that penetrates to the inside of the cover member 4202. In addition, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmissive portion 4222, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LEDs 4045 can be easily distinguished.

  Around the transmissive portion 4222, there is provided a shielding portion 4224 configured such that light is less likely to pass than the transmissive portion 4222 that covers the window 4206. In other words, the shielding portion 4224 is disposed so as to surround the window 4206 on the front side of the cover member 4202. The shielding part 4224 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmission part 4222, and in this embodiment, a part other than the transmission part 4222 is configured in one sheet constituting the identification means 4220. The shielding portion 4224 is disposed so as to overlap with a region other than the window 4206 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 of the cover member 4202, and does not cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding unit 4224 is composed of a dark color such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black or a cold color such as amber, or the like, and has a low degree of brightness (absorbs light well). Is different.

  Thus, since the shielding part 4224 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the transmissive part 4222, the transmissive part 4222 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmissive part 4222 is further improved. It becomes easy to distinguish. Even if the window 4206 and the transmission portion 4222 are misaligned, it is difficult to understand that the window 4206 is not visible because it cannot be seen directly. Moreover, if the transmissive portion 4222 is placed on the window 4206, the transmissive portion 4222 surrounded by the shielding portion 4224 shines, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.

  In addition, the shielding part 4224 is not limited to the configuration in which the transmission part 4222 is set to the same sheet, but the front surface of the front cover part 4208 of the cover member 4202 is set as the shielding part 4224, and the transparent part of the sheet is interposed therebetween. Alternatively, other configurations such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 4224 appears on the front side by not arranging the sheet on the front side of the shielding portion 4224 may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the combination area 4226 is partitioned by a partition mark 4228 composed of a frame line (this embodiment) displayed on the shielding unit 4224. The division mark 4228 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of transmission parts 4222, and the combination area 4226 surrounded by the division mark 4228 can be recognized separately from other areas. For example, the first and second special symbol displays 4000 and 4010, the first and second special symbol hold displays 4001 and 4011, the probability variation display 4020, the time-shortening display 4021, the right-handed display 4022 and the jackpot round number display 4030, the normal symbol display 4040, and the normal symbol hold display 4041, among these, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (transmission portion 4222) constitute a display device, and a group of transmission portions 4222 corresponding to the display device is provided. A combination area 4226 corresponding to each display is formed by being surrounded by a division mark 4228. In addition, the division label 4228 is not limited to the form of the frame line, and may have any configuration that can recognize that it is distinguished from other areas, such as adding characters or changing the color in the combination area 4226. .

  As shown in FIG. 78, specifically, the transmissive part 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row is surrounded by the division mark 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the first special symbol display 4000 is displayed. The transmission part 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 in the upper row is surrounded by the division mark 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol display 4010 is displayed. The transmission part 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol display 4000 and the second special symbol display 4010 is surrounded by a division mark 4228, and corresponds to the first special symbol hold display 4001. The combination area 4226 to be displayed is displayed. A transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol display 4010 is surrounded by a section mark 4228, and a combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol hold indicator 4011 is displayed. In addition, the transmissive part 4222 corresponding to the eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row is surrounded by the division mark 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the big hit round number display 4030 is displayed. A transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the big round number display unit 4030 is surrounded by a section mark 4228, and a combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol display unit 4040 is displayed. A transmissive part 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 from the right side of the lower row is surrounded by a section mark 4228, and a combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol holding display 4041 is displayed.

  Thus, by displaying the combination area 4226, the state of the LED 4045 in the area is recognized in association with each other, and the player can easily recognize information by the combination of the LED 4045.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the identification means 4220 is arranged to overlap the first layer 4230 on the front side of the cover member 4202 other than the window 4206 on the first layer 4230, which is easy to transmit light, and from the first layer 4230. Is a sheet having a second layer 4232 that hardly transmits light. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmissive portion 4222 is configured only by the first layer 4230 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 4224 that is difficult to transmit light is between the first layer 4230 and the second layer 4232. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 4232, it is difficult to transmit light as a whole and prevents light from being transmitted from the shielding portion 4224. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 4230 is disposed on the cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 4232 is disposed on the front side (front side). The identification unit 4220 is obtained by, for example, laminating the second layer 4232 on a sheet formed of the first layer 4230 by painting, printing, or the like, and there is a level difference that can be visually recognized between the transmission part 4222 and the shielding part 4224. Absent.

  When the indicator 2408 is attached to the plate member 2400 of the game board 2310, the connector 4100 on the rear surface is exposed to the rear side of the game board 2310. The display 2408 can be attached to and detached from the connector 4100 in a state where the display 2408 is attached to the plate member 2400, which is easy to use.

  The cover member 4202 includes a synthetic resin such as a thermoplastic resin in which the front cover portion 4208, the side cover portion 4210, the window defining portion 4212, the engagement receiving portion 4216, and the alignment portion 4600 are integrally formed. The molded product which consists of is used. In addition, as the protection member 4204, a molded product made of a synthetic resin such as a thermoplastic resin in which each part such as the engagement part 4214 is integrally formed is used.

  Note that the display substrate 4200 is difficult to remove, reassemble, or reattach to the cover member 4202 by welding or bonding the display substrate 4200 to the cover member 4202 in a state where the surface is covered with the cover member 4202. You may attach in the state in which a removal trace remains.

  Next, the first and second special symbol indicators 4000 and 4010, the first and second special symbol hold indicators 4001 and 4011, the probability variation indicator 4020, the hourly indicator 4021, the right-handed indicator 4022, and the jackpot round number display The device 4030, the normal symbol display 4040, and the normal symbol hold display 4041 will be described in detail.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 4000 displays the stop symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the first special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. On the first special symbol display 4000, a big hit symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” or a lost symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is lost Is done.

  When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 4010 displays the stop symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the second special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. On the second special symbol display 4010, a big hit symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit” or a lost symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a loss is displayed in a stopped manner. Is done.

  Each of the first and second special symbol indicators 4000 and 4010 is composed of six LEDs 4045 arranged in a line, and each LED 4045 is turned on or off according to the symbol to be stopped. By the way, when a game ball is newly won in the first starter 2402 while the symbol change display or the big hit game related to the first special symbol determination is being performed, the first is triggered by this winning. Special symbol determination and symbol variation display cannot be executed immediately. Therefore, the gaming machine 2301 according to the present embodiment reserves the right of the first special symbol determination when the first special symbol determination cannot be executed immediately even if a game ball wins the first starting device 2402. It is configured. The first special symbol hold display 4001 displays the number of hold of the first special symbol determination held in this way.

  Similarly, when a game ball is newly won in the second starting device 2403 while the symbol change display or jackpot game related to the second special symbol determination is being performed, 2. Special symbol determination and symbol variation display cannot be executed immediately. Accordingly, the gaming machine 2301 in the present embodiment is configured so that the right of the second special symbol determination is suspended when the second special symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if a game ball wins the second starting device 2403. It is configured. The second special symbol hold indicator 4011 displays the number of hold of the second special symbol determination held in this way.

  In the present embodiment, a maximum of four holds can be made for each of the first and second special symbol determinations. Each of the first and second special symbol hold indicators 4001 and 4011 is composed of two adjacent LEDs 4045. When the number of holdings is 0, the two LEDs 4045 are turned off. When the number of holdings is 1, the right LED 4045 is turned on and the left LED 4045 is turned off. When the number is two, two LEDs 4045 are lit. Further, when the number of holdings is 3, the right LED 4045 blinks and the left LED 4045 is lit, and when the number of holdings is 4, two LEDs 4045 are blinking.

  When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 4040 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by suspending and displaying the stop symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol. Note that the normal symbol determination and the symbol variation display related to the normal symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if the game ball passes through the gate 2405, for example, during the symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 4040, the normal symbol is displayed. Judgment rights are withheld. The normal symbol hold display 4041 displays the number of hold for normal symbol determination held in this way.

  The normal symbol display 4040 is composed of three LEDs 4045 arranged in a line, and each LED 4045 is turned on or off according to the stop symbol. In the present embodiment, up to four holds can be performed for the normal symbol determination.

  The normal symbol hold display 4041 is composed of two adjacent LEDs 4045. Like the first and second special symbol hold indicators 4001 and 4011, when the number of holds is zero, the two LEDs 4045 are turned off. When the number of holdings is one, the right LED 4045 is turned on and the left LED 4045 is turned off. When the number of holdings is two, the two LEDs 4045 are turned on. Become. Further, when the number of holdings is 3, the right LED 4045 blinks and the left LED 4045 is lit, and when the number of holdings is 4, two LEDs 4045 are blinking.

  In the following description, a symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 4000 or the second special symbol display 4010 is called a “special symbol”, and a symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 4040 is “normal symbol”. Shall be called.

  In the present embodiment, “normal game state” and “probability game state” are provided as states related to the big hit determination. The “normal gaming state” refers to a gaming state that has a relatively low probability of being a big hit in the special symbol determination, and the “probability gaming state” refers to a gaming state that has a relatively high probability.

  The probability change display 4020 indicates a state related to the big hit determination of the gaming machine 2301, and is configured by one LED 4045. When the “normal gaming state” is set, the LED 4045 is turned off. When the “probability gaming state” is set, the LED 4045 is turned on.

  In the present embodiment, a “non-short game state” and a “short-time game state” are provided as states relating to the electric tulip 2404 disposed in the vicinity of the second starting device 2403. It should be noted that the states related to the big hit determination (normal gaming state, probability variation gaming state) and the states related to the electric tulip 2404 (non-short-time gaming state, short-time gaming state) can be associated with each other and are independent. You can also.

  In the present embodiment, “non-short game state” means that the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol determination is set to be as long as 12 seconds, and the opening control time of the second starter 2403 when winning the win is 0 A game state that is set as short as 2 seconds. In other words, when the game ball passes through the gate 2405, the normal symbol is drawn and the normal symbol display 4040 displays the variation of the normal symbol, but the normal symbol stops 12 seconds after the variation display is started. indicate. If the lottery result is a win, the second starter 2403 is opened for about 0.2 seconds by the operation of the electric tulip 2404 after the normal symbol stop display.

  On the other hand, the “short-time gaming state” means that the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol determination is set to 3 seconds, which is shorter than the “non-short-time gaming state”, and the second start when winning in the win A game state in which the opening control time of the device 2403 is set to 3.5 seconds, which is set longer than the “non-short game state”. Furthermore, in the “non-short game state”, the probability of winning in the normal symbol determination is set to 1/65536, and in the “short time game state”, the probability of winning in the normal symbol determination is set to 65535/65536. The

  The time reduction indicator 4021 indicates a state related to the electric tulip 2404 and includes one LED 4045. In the “non-short game state”, the LED 4045 is turned off. In the “short time game state”, the LED 4045 is turned on.

  Further, as described above, in this embodiment, during the big hit game, it is necessary to make a right turn to generate a winning to the big winning device 2406. In other cases, to the first starting device 2402. Left-handed is required to generate a prize.

  The right-handed display 4022 indicates whether right-handed or left-handed should be performed, and includes one LED 4045. When left-handed is required, the LED 4045 is turned off. When right-handed is required, the LED 4045 is turned on.

  Moreover, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, the jackpot game is comprised from several rounds. The jackpot round number display 4030 indicates the round of the jackpot game, and is composed of eight LEDs 4045. During the big hit game, each LED 4045 is turned on or off according to the current round.

  The sub display 2420 has the same configuration as the display unit 5700 of the embodiment C described later, and includes 10 LEDs as an example.

[Internal configuration of gaming machine 2301]
FIG. 63 is a block diagram of the gaming machine 2301. The gaming machine 2301 includes a main control board 2500, a payout control board 2510, an effect control board 2520, an image control board 2530, a lamp control board 2540, a launch control board 2550, and a power supply board 2560.

  The main control board 2500 controls the basic operation of the gaming machine. The main control board 2500 includes a one-chip microcomputer 2501, and the one-chip microcomputer 2501 includes a main CPU 2501a, a main ROM 2501b, and a main RAM 2501c. The main control board 2500 includes an input port and an output port (both not shown) for main control.

  The main control input port has a general winning opening detection switch 2502 for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning device 2407, a gate detection switch 2503 for detecting that a game ball has entered the gate 2405, A first start port detection switch 2504 for detecting that a game ball has entered the first starter 2402; a second start port detection switch 2505 for detecting that a game ball has entered the second starter 2403; A big prize opening detection switch 2506 for detecting that a game ball has entered the device 2406 and a payout control board 2510 are connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 2500 through the main control input port.

  In addition, the main control output port includes a start opening / closing solenoid 2507 for opening / closing a plate of the electric tulip 2404 arranged close to the second starter 2403, and a big winning opening for operating a plate for opening / closing the big winning device 2406. A game information output terminal board 2509 for outputting an external information signal, a payout control board 2510, and an effect control board 2520 are connected to one or both of the open / close solenoid 2508, the display 2408, and the sub-display 2420. Various signals are output from the main control output port.

  As described above, both or one of the display 2408 and the sub-display 2420 are provided with the first and second special symbol displays 4000 and 4010, the first and second special symbol hold indicators 4001 and 4011, and the probability change display. Unit 4020, hour-speed display 4021, right-handed display 4022, jackpot round number display 4030, normal symbol display 4040, and normal symbol hold display 4041. Each of these indicators 4000 to 4041 is a main control. Connected to the output port.

  The game information output terminal board 2509 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated in the main control board 2500 to a hall computer or the like of the game shop. The game information output terminal board 2509 is connected to the main control board 2500 by wiring, and the game information output terminal board 2509 is provided with a connector for connecting to a hall computer of a game store.

  In the one-chip microcomputer 2501 of the main control board 2500, the main CPU 2501a reads out the program stored in the main ROM 2501b based on the input signals from the detection switches and timers, performs arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device. Alternatively, a command is transmitted to another board according to the result of the arithmetic processing.

  The main ROM 2501b stores a game control program and tables necessary for various games. For example, a jackpot determination table referred to in the jackpot lottery, a symbol determination table for determining a special symbol stop symbol, a variation pattern determination table for determining a special symbol variation pattern, and the like are stored. The tables listed here are only a part, and a number of tables (not shown) are provided.

  Furthermore, the main RAM 2501c functions as a data work area when the main CPU 2501a performs arithmetic processing, and has a plurality of storage areas. For example, the main RAM 2501c stores a normal symbol determination hold number, a normal symbol random number, a special symbol hold number, a round number R, a number of balls entered into a big winning device, a probability variable game flag, a short-time game flag, and the like. In addition to the information listed here, a lot of information is stored.

  The payout control board 2510 performs game ball launch control and prize ball payout control. The payout control board 2510 includes a one-chip microcomputer including a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown), and is connected to the main control board 2500 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. The payout CPU reads out a program stored in the payout ROM based on an input signal from the payout ball measuring switch 2511, the door opening switch 2512, and the timer that detects whether or not the game ball has been paid out, and performs arithmetic processing. And corresponding data is transmitted to the main control board 2500 based on the processing. Further, a payout motor 2513 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from a game ball storage unit to a player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 2510. The payout CPU reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 2500, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 2513 of the prize ball payout device to execute a predetermined prize. Pay the ball to the player. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a data work area at the time of calculation processing of the payout CPU.

  The effect control board 2520 mainly controls each effect such as during gaming or standby. The effect control board 2520 includes a sub CPU 2520a, a sub ROM 2520b, and a sub RAM 2520c, and is connected to the main control board 2500 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 2500 to the effect control board 2520. . The sub CPU 2520a reads out a program stored in the sub ROM 2520b based on a command transmitted from the main control board 2500, an effect button detection switch 2521, an effect key detection switch 2522, and an input signal from the timer, and performs arithmetic processing. At the same time, based on the processing, corresponding data is transmitted to the image control board 2530 and the lamp control board 2540. The sub RAM 2520c functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 2520a performs arithmetic processing.

  For example, when the sub CPU 2520a in the effect control board 2520 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol from the main control board 2500, the sub CPU 2520a analyzes the content of the received fluctuation pattern designation command, and displays the liquid crystal display device 2401, audio Data for causing the output device 2531, the effect driving device 2541, and the effect illumination device 2542 to execute a predetermined effect is generated, and these data are transmitted to the image control board 2530 and the lamp control board 2540.

  The sub ROM 2520b of the effect control board 2520 stores an effect control program and data and tables necessary for determining various games. For example, an effect pattern determination table for determining an effect pattern based on a variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 2500, an ornamental symbol determination table for determining a combination of ornamental symbols to be stopped, and the like are stored in the sub ROM 2520b. Has been. In addition, the table mentioned above only enumerates the characteristic table among the tables in this embodiment as an example, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided.

  The sub RAM 2520c of the effect control board 2520 has a plurality of storage areas. In these storage areas, a game state, an effect mode, an effect pattern, a decorative pattern, a counting counter, firing operation information, and the like are stored. In addition to this, a lot of information is stored.

  The image control board 2530 includes an image CPU (not shown), control ROM, control RAM, CGROM, VRAM, VDP, audio CPU, audio ROM, and audio RAM for performing image display control of the liquid crystal display device 2401. . The image control board 2530 is connected to the effect control board 2520 so that bidirectional communication is possible, and a liquid crystal display device 2401 and an audio output device 2531 are connected to the output side thereof.

  The image CPU performs control to display a predetermined image on the VDP based on the command received from the effect control board 2520. The control RAM functions as a data work area at the time of calculation processing of the image CPU, and temporarily stores data read from the control ROM. The control ROM stores a control processing program of the image CPU, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of the effect pattern, animation scene information, and the like.

  The CGROM stores a large number of image data such as decorative symbols and backgrounds displayed on the liquid crystal display device 2401. The image CPU reads a predetermined program based on a command transmitted from the effect control board 2520, and the CGROM The predetermined image data stored in the VRAM is developed in the VRAM, and the liquid crystal display device 2401 displays the image data developed in the VRAM.

  The audio ROM stores a large number of audio data to be output from the audio output device 2531. The audio CPU reads a predetermined program based on a command transmitted from the effect control board 2520 and Audio output control is performed in the output device 2531.

The lamp control board 2540 controls lighting of a board lamp (not shown) provided on the game board 2310 and controls a frame lamp 2313 provided on the frame member 2311. The lamp control board 2540 controls energization of a drive source such as a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect driving device 2541. This lamp control board 2540 is connected to the effect control board 2520, and performs each control described above based on the data transmitted from the effect control board 2520.

  The firing control board 2550 receives a touch signal from the touch sensor 2551 and performs energization control on the firing solenoid 2553 and the ball feed solenoid 2554 based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 2552.

  The touch sensor 2551 includes a capacitive proximity switch that uses a change in capacitance caused by the player touching the handle 2318. When the touch sensor 2551 detects that the player touches the handle 2318, the launch control board is detected. A touch signal for permitting energization of the firing solenoid 2553 is output to 2550.

  The firing volume 2552 is composed of a variable resistor, and a constant voltage (for example, 5 V) applied to the firing volume 2552 is divided by the variable resistor, and the divided voltage is supplied to the firing control board 2550.

  Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 2553 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 2550. As a result, the number of game balls fired per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one ball is fired every time the firing solenoid rotates. That is, one game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

  Note that the touch signal from the touch sensor 2551 and the voltage signal from the firing volume 2552 are input to the effect control board 2520. As a result, the launch of the game ball can be detected on the effect control board 2520.

  The power supply board 2560 includes a backup power supply including a capacitor, and supplies a power supply voltage to each unit in the gaming machine 2301. Specifically, the power supply board 2560 supplies a power supply voltage to the main control board 2500, the payout control board 2510, the effect control board 2520, and the launch control board 2550. The power supply board 2560 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 2301 and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 2500 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 2501a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 2501a becomes operation stopped. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and for example, a battery may be used, and a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

[Main control board processing]
The timer interrupt process executed in the main control board 2500 will be described using FIG. Here, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 2500. The main control board 2500 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 64 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. . Note that the processing of the main control board 2500 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 64 and the subsequent steps is executed by the main CPU 2501a based on a program stored in the main ROM 2501b.

  First, in S2601, random number update processing is executed. This process is to update various random values of the jackpot random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number, and normal symbol random number. These random numbers are incremented by “1” every time this process is performed. Each random value is returned to “0” after reaching a preset maximum value.

  In S2602, a switch process is performed. This process is executed when a detection signal from each switch is input. Details of the switch process will be described later. In S2603, special symbol processing is performed. This process includes a process of causing the first special symbol display 4000 or the second special symbol display 4010 to variably display the special symbol and then stopping and displaying a stop symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination. Details of the special symbol process will be described later.

  In S2604, normal symbol processing is performed. This process includes a process of executing normal symbol determination, causing the normal symbol display 4040 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Details of this normal symbol processing will be described later.

  In S2605, electric tulip processing is performed. This process is to operate the electric tulip 2404 when it is determined that the second starting device 2403 is to be released as a result of the normal symbol determination. Details of the electric tulip process will be described later.

  In S2606, a special winning opening release control process is performed. In this process, when it is determined in S2603 that it is a big hit, the big prize opening / closing solenoid 2508 is controlled to open the big prize device 2406. Details of the big prize opening control process will be described later.

  In S2607, prize ball processing is executed. This process controls the payout of prize balls according to the winning of game balls. In S2608, status notification processing is executed. This process notifies the possibility of being in a non-operating state based on the number of holdings of the normal symbol determination and the special symbol determination and the gaming state. Details of the status notification process will be described later.

  In S2609, transmission processing is executed. In this processing, information necessary for determining various commands and production contents set (stored) in the main RAM 2501c in the processing steps before S2607 is transmitted to the production control board 2520.

[Switch processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing details of the switch processing in S2602 of FIG. In the first S2701, the first start port switch process is executed. This process monitors the presence / absence of a detection signal input from the first start port detection switch 2504, and various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit design random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number that are updated as appropriate by the processing of S2601. ) Is obtained at the time when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 2504 is input. The first start port switch process will be further described later.

  In subsequent S2702, the second start port switch process is executed. This process monitors the presence / absence of a detection signal input from the second start port detection switch 2505, and various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number that are appropriately updated by the processing of S2601. ) Is obtained at the time when the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 2505 is input. The second start port switch process will be further described later.

  In the next S2703, gate switch processing is executed. This process monitors the presence / absence of a detection signal input from the gate detection switch 2503, and obtains the value at the time when the detection signal from the gate detection switch 2503 is input for the normal symbol random number updated as appropriate in the process of S2601. To get. The gate switch process will be further described later.

[First start switch processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing details of the first start port switch process in S2701 of FIG.

  In the first S2801, it is determined whether or not the first start port detection switch 2504 is turned “ON”. This process is based on whether or not a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 2504 (ON signal indicating that the first start port detection switch 2504 is “ON”) is input. It is determined whether or not the detection switch 2504 is “ON”. If it is determined that the first start port detection switch 2504 is “ON” (S2801: YES), the process proceeds to S2802. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first start port detection switch 2504 is not “ON” (S2801: NO), the subsequent processing is not executed and the first start port switch process is terminated.

  In S2802, it is determined whether or not the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1. In this process, the first special symbol determination hold number U1 stored in the main RAM 2501c is less than the first special symbol determination maximum hold number Umax1 ("4" in this embodiment) stored in the main ROM 2501b in advance. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (S2802: YES), the process proceeds to S2803. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number U1 is greater than or equal to the maximum hold number Umax1 (S2802: NO), the subsequent process is not executed and the first start port switch process is terminated.

  In S2803, the value of the holding number U1 is updated to a value obtained by adding “1”. In S2804 to S2807, various random numbers are acquired. In this process, a big hit random number, a big hit design random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired as acquisition information used for the first special symbol determination, and these random numbers are associated and stored in the main RAM 2501c. .

  In S2808, a hold command for notifying that the first special symbol determination is put on hold is set in the main RAM 2501c. This hold command is transmitted to the effect control board 2520 by the transmission process of S2609.

[Second start-up switch processing]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing details of the second start port switch process in S2702 of FIG. The second start port switch process is the same as the first start port switch process described above.

  In the first S2901, it is determined whether or not the second start port detection switch 2505 is turned “ON”. This process is performed based on whether or not a detection signal from the second start port detection switch 2505 (ON signal indicating that the second start port detection switch 2505 is “ON”) is input. It is determined whether or not the detection switch 2505 is turned “ON”. If it is determined here that the second start port detection switch 2505 has been turned “ON” (S2901: YES), the flow proceeds to S2902. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second start port detection switch 2505 is not “ON” (S2901: NO), the subsequent processing is not executed and the second start port switch process is terminated.

  In S2902, it is determined whether or not the hold number U2 is less than the maximum hold number Umax2. In this process, the second special symbol determination hold number U2 stored in the main RAM 2501c is less than the second special symbol determination maximum hold number Umax2 ("4" in this embodiment) stored in the main ROM 2501b in advance. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined that the hold number U2 is less than the maximum hold number Umax2 (S2902: YES), the process proceeds to S2903. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number U2 is equal to or greater than the maximum hold number Umax2 (S2902: NO), the subsequent process is not executed and the second start port switch process is terminated.

  In S2903, the value of the hold count U2 is updated to a value obtained by adding “1”. In S2904 to S2907, various random numbers are acquired. In this process, as the acquisition information used for the second special symbol determination, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated with each other and stored in the main RAM 2501c. .

  In S2908, a hold command for notifying that the second special symbol determination is put on hold is set in the main RAM 2501c. This hold command is transmitted to the effect control board 2520 by the transmission process of S2609.

[Gate switch processing]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing details of the gate switch processing in S2703 of FIG.

  In the first S3001, it is determined whether or not the gate detection switch 2503 is turned “ON”. In this process, the gate detection switch 2503 is turned “ON” based on whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 2503 (ON signal indicating that the gate detection switch 2503 is “ON”) is input. It is determined whether or not. Here, when it is determined that the gate detection switch 2503 is “ON” (S3001: YES), the process proceeds to S3002. On the other hand, if it is determined that the gate detection switch 2503 is not “ON” (S3001: NO), the subsequent processing is not executed and the gate switch processing is terminated.

  In S3002, it is determined whether or not the hold number T is less than the maximum hold number Tmax. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number T of normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 2501c is less than the maximum number Tmax (for example, “4”) of normal symbol determination stored in the main ROM 2501b in advance. To do. Here, when it is determined that the hold number T is less than the maximum hold number Tmax (S3002: YES), the process proceeds to S3003. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number T is equal to or greater than the maximum hold number Tmax (S3002: NO), the subsequent process is not executed and the gate switch process is terminated.

  In S3003, the hold count T is updated to a value obtained by adding “1”. In subsequent S3004, a normal symbol random number used for normal symbol determination is acquired and stored in the main RAM 2501c.

[Special symbol processing]
The details of the special symbol process executed by the main control board 2500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol process in S2603 of FIG.

  In first S3101, it is determined whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the big hit game is being played, the big hit game flag stored in the main RAM 2501c is set to “ON”. This process is to determine whether or not the big hit game flag stored in the main RAM 2501c is set to “ON”. If it is determined that the game is a big hit game (S3101: YES), the subsequent symbol processing is terminated without executing the subsequent processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not a big hit game (S3101: NO), the process proceeds to S3102.

  In step S3102, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation display is being performed. If it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not in progress (S3102: NO), the flow shifts to S3103. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is being changed (S3102: YES), the flow proceeds to S3111.

  In S3103, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings U1 of the first special symbol determination or the number of holdings U2 of the second special symbol determination is “1” or more. If it is determined that at least one of the holding numbers U1 and U2 is “1” or more (S3103: YES), the process proceeds to S3104. On the other hand, when it is determined that both the holding numbers U1 and U2 are “0” (S3103: NO), the subsequent process is not executed and the special symbol process is terminated.

  In S3104, the number of holdings U1 of the first special symbol determination or the number of holdings U2 of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1”. Here, the number of reservations U2 for the second special symbol determination is preferentially subtracted, and when the number of reservations U2 for the second special symbol determination is “0”, the number of reservations U1 for the first special symbol determination is subtracted.

  In S3105, the storage area is shifted. This process executes a shift process for the storage area of the main RAM 2501c. Specifically, the first or second special symbol determination jackpot random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number that were subtracted in S3104 are the first stored in the reserved storage area (the oldest one) Are shifted to the determination storage area, and the rest are shifted to the determination storage area.

  In S3106, a big hit determination process is executed. In this process, the jackpot determination process is executed based on the random number stored in the determination storage area. By executing the big hit determination process, it is determined whether the big hit or the loss is made, and stop symbol setting information indicating the determination result is set in the main RAM 2501c. If it is determined that the game is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined (the type of the big hit determines whether the number of rounds of the big hit game, whether to shift to the probable gaming state or the short-time gaming state after the big hit game) ). Details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

  In S3107, a variation pattern selection process is executed. Specifically, referring to the variation pattern table stored in advance in the main ROM 2501b, the determination result of the big hit determination in S3106, the type of the stopped symbol set in the main RAM 2501c, the current gaming state, the special symbol determination pending The variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the reach random number and the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area together with the numbers U1, U2 and the jackpot random number. By performing the process of S3107, it is also determined whether to perform a reachable effect or a reachless effect. Details of the variation pattern selection process will be described later.

  In S3108, a change start command is set. This process includes the symbol setting information set in S3106, information indicating whether the symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination, A change start command is set in the main RAM 2501c including change pattern setting information set in the process, information indicating which of the effects with and without reach, information regarding the gaming state of the gaming machine 2301, and the like. is there. This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the variation effect accompanying the special symbol variation display, and is transmitted to the effect control board 2520 by the transmission processing of S2609.

  On the other hand, the effect control board 2520 needs to specify the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the variation start command received from the main control board 2500 and perform either the effect with reach or the effect without reach. To determine the game state of the gaming machine 2301 by acquiring the variation time during which the special symbol is variably displayed. From the voice output device 2531, the pattern in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 2401 in accordance with the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 4000 or the second special symbol display 4010. The sound output is determined, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 2313 is determined, etc., and the image control board 2530 and the lamp control board 2540 execute the effect of the determined content.

  In S3109, the variable display is started. This process starts the special symbol fluctuation display based on the setting information included in the fluctuation start command set in the process of S3108. This special symbol variation display is performed using the first special symbol display 4000 or the second special symbol display 4010.

  In S3110, measurement of the variation time is started. In this process, measurement of a variation time that is an elapsed time since the start of variation display is started. In next step S3111, it is determined whether or not the variation time has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the process in S3107 has elapsed since the measurement of the variation time in S3110. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S3111: NO), the special symbol process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S3111: YES), the process proceeds to S3112.

  In S3112, a symbol confirmation command is set. This process sets a symbol confirmation command in the main RAM 2501c for notifying the first special symbol display 4000 or the second special symbol display 4010 that the stop symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is to be stopped. is there. The symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 2520 by the transmission process in S2609. Thereby, the process etc. which stop-display the decoration symbol which was variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 2401 in the aspect which shows the determination result of special symbol determination, etc. are performed.

  In S3113, the variable display ends. This process ends the special symbol variation display started in the process of S3109. At that time, the stop symbol (big hit symbol or lost symbol) set in the process of S3106 is stopped and displayed on the first and second special symbol indicators 4000 and 4010 that have variably displayed the special symbol. Specifically, when the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4000, the first special symbol display 4000 stops and displays the big hit symbol or the lost symbol, and the second special symbol display 4010 When the special symbol is variably displayed, the big special symbol or the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 4010.

  In S3114, the measured variation time is reset. This process is to reset the variation time when the measurement is started in the process of S3110. In continuing S3115, the process during a stop is performed. This process includes a process of starting a big hit game in the case of a big hit. Details of the stop process will be described later.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit determination process in S3106 of FIG.

  In the first S3201, a big hit determination is performed. Here, when the big hit determination relating to winning in the first starter 2402 is executed, the big special hit determination table of the first special symbol stored in the main ROM 2501b in advance is used. On the other hand, when the jackpot determination relating to winning in the second starter 2403 is executed, the jackpot determination table of the second special symbol stored in advance in the main ROM 2501b is used.

  A jackpot random number is described in the jackpot determination table of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot is determined based on whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches the random number value described in the jackpot determination table of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If they do not match, it is determined to be lost. At this time, as an example, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, among the random numbers of 0 to 598, the big hit random number is either “7” or “8”, and when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, The big hit random number is any one of “7” to “26”.

  In subsequent S3202, it is determined whether or not a big hit. This process determines whether or not the game is a big hit based on the determination result of S3201. If it is determined that the game is a big hit (S3202: YES), the process proceeds to S3203. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S3202: NO), that is, when it is a loss, a stop symbol corresponding to the loss is set in S3205, and the big hit determination process is terminated.

  In S3203, the type of jackpot is determined. In this process, the type of jackpot is determined using the jackpot symbol determination table stored in the main RAM 2501c. Here, based on the jackpot symbol random number stored in the determination storage area, it is determined whether the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot.

  In S3204, a big hit symbol is set. In this process, a jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the process of S3203 is set in the main RAM 2501c as setting information. As a result, during the process of S3113 described above, the jackpot symbol set here is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol on the first special symbol display 4000 or the second special symbol display 4010, and the jackpot game is executed. become. After the process of S3204, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Variation pattern selection processing]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing details of the variation pattern selection processing in S3107 of FIG.

  In first S3301, it is determined whether or not a big hit. This process is based on the jackpot determination in S3201 of FIG. If it is determined that the game is a big hit (S3301: YES), the process proceeds to S3302. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a big hit (S3301: NO), that is, if it is a loss, the process proceeds to S3305.

  In S3302, it is determined whether or not the probability variation big hit. This processing is based on the jackpot type determined in S3203 of FIG. If it is determined that it is a probable big hit (S3302: YES), the fluctuation pattern table for the probable big hit is set in S3303, and then the process proceeds to S3309. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a probable big hit (S3302: NO), that is, if it is a normal big hit, a normal big hit variation pattern table is set in S3304, and then the flow proceeds to S3309.

  In S3305, which is shifted when it is determined that the game is not a big hit, the gaming state and the number of reserved balls are determined. This process is to determine whether the current gaming state is a short-time gaming state or a non-short-time gaming state based on the short-time gaming flag stored in the main RAM 2501c. Moreover, the number of pending special symbol determinations is determined. As a result, the corresponding variation pattern table is narrowed down.

  In S3306, it is determined whether or not it is reach. In the case of a loss, this process determines whether or not to perform a reach effect to make the player expect a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach random number stored in the determination storage area matches the reach random number described in the variation pattern table. Here, when it is determined that it is reach (S3306: YES), the process proceeds to S3307. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not reach (S3306: NO), the process proceeds to S3308.

  In step S3307, a reach variation pattern table is set. In this process, the reach variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 2501b based on the gaming state and the number of reserved balls determined in S3305, and is set in the main RAM 2501c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S3309.

  In S3308, a fluctuation pattern table without reach is set. In this process, the unreachable variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 2501b based on the gaming state and the number of reserved balls determined in S3305 and set in the main RAM 2501c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S3309.

  In S3309, a variation pattern random number determination process is performed. In this process, the fluctuation pattern random number is determined using the fluctuation pattern table set in the process of S3303, S3304, S3307, or S3308. Specifically, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area is selected with reference to the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 2501c. By performing the processing of S3309, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is determined.

  In S3310, a variation pattern is set. In this process, the variation pattern selected in S3309 is set in the main RAM 2501c as setting information. The variation pattern setting information is included in the variation start command set in the process of S3108 in FIG. 69 together with the symbols set in the big hit determination process, and is transmitted to the effect control board 2520 by the transmission process of S2609.

[Processing while stopped]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing details of the stopping process in S3115 in FIG.

  In first S3401, it is determined whether or not a big hit. This process is to determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the determination result of S3201 in FIG. If it is determined that the game is a big hit (S3401: YES), the big win game flag is set to “ON” in S3402, and then the process proceeds to S3403. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S3401: NO), the process proceeds to S3406.

  In S3403, it is determined whether or not the time-saving game flag is “ON”. In this process, it is determined whether or not the hourly game flag stored in the main RAM 2501c is set to “ON”. The short-time game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine 2301 is the short-time game state, and is set to “ON” when the normal game state shifts to the short-time game state. It is set to “OFF” when returning to the gaming state. If it is determined that the short-time game flag is set to “ON” (S3403: YES), the short-time game flag is set to “OFF” in S3404, and then the process proceeds to S3405. On the other hand, if it is determined that the short-time game flag is not set to “ON” (S3403: NO), that is, if the short-time game flag is set to “OFF”, the processing of S3404 is not executed. The process moves to S3405.

  In S3405, an opening command is set in the main RAM 2501c. The opening refers to a period from the start of the big hit game until the first prize winning device 2406 starts to be released. The opening command is a command for notifying that the opening is started, and is transmitted to the effect control board 2520 by the transmission process of S2609.

  In S3406, which is shifted to a case where it is determined that the game is not a big hit in S3401, it is determined whether or not the probability variation game flag is “ON”. The probability change game flag is stored in the main RAM 2501c, and is “ON” when the probability change game state is set, and is “OFF” when the normal game state is set. If it is determined that the probability variation game flag is “ON” (S3406: YES), the subsequent processing is terminated without executing the subsequent processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is “OFF” (S3406: NO), the process proceeds to S3407.

  In S3407, it is determined whether or not the time-saving game flag is “ON”. The time saving game flag is stored in the main RAM 2501c, and is set to “ON” when the time saving gaming state is set, and is set to “OFF” when the non-time saving gaming status is set. If it is determined that the time-saving game flag is “ON” (S3407: YES), the flow shifts to S3408. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time-saving game flag is “OFF” (S3407: NO), the subsequent processing is terminated without executing the subsequent processing.

  In S3408, “1” is subtracted from the short-time fluctuation count W, and the short-time fluctuation count W is updated. The time fluctuation count W is stored in the main RAM 2501c. In S3409, it is determined whether or not the number of time fluctuations W is “0”. If it is determined that W = 0 (S3409: YES), the time-saving game flag is set to “OFF” in S3410, and then the in-stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if W ≠ 0 (S3409: NO), the process in S3410 is not executed and the stopped process is terminated.

[Normal pattern processing]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing details of the normal symbol processing in S2604 of FIG. In first S3501, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game flag is “ON”. This process determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the main RAM 2501c is set to “ON”. The auxiliary game flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the electric tulip 2404 is in an auxiliary game in which the operation of returning to the closed position after maintaining the open position for a specified time is performed, and is set to “ON” during the auxiliary game. When it is not in the auxiliary game, “OFF” is set. If it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (S3501: YES), the subsequent process is not executed and the normal symbol process is terminated. In this case, it moves to the electric tulip process of S2605. On the other hand, if it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not “ON” (S3501: NO), that is, if the auxiliary game flag is set to “OFF”, the process proceeds to S3502.

  In S3502, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is changing. This process determines whether or not the variable display on the normal symbol display 4040 is being performed. Here, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not changing (S3502: NO), the process proceeds to S3503. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol is changing (S3502: YES), the flow shifts to S3514.

  In S3503 which is shifted to when the normal symbol is changing, it is determined whether or not the number T of the normal symbol determination is “1” or more. Here, when it is determined that the hold number T is “1” or more (S3503: YES), the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of holds T is not “1” or more (S3503: NO), that is, if the number of holds T is “0”, the subsequent process is not executed and the normal symbol processing is terminated. .

  In S3504, the number T of holding is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1”. In step S3505, a hit random number determination process is performed. In this process, whether the oldest normal symbol random number among the normal symbol random numbers stored in the main RAM 2501c in S3004 in FIG. 68 matches any of the winning values related to the normal symbol determination stored in the main ROM 2501b in advance. It is to determine whether or not.

  In S3506, it is determined whether or not it is a win. This process determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win based on the determination result of S3505. If it is determined that it is a win (S3506: YES), the win symbol is set in the main RAM 2501c in S3507, and then the process proceeds to S3509. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a hit (S3506: NO), that is, if it is a loss, the lost symbol is set in the main RAM 2501c in S3508, and then the flow proceeds to S3509.

  In S3509, it is determined whether or not the normal gaming state. This process is to determine whether or not the current gaming state of the gaming machine 2301 is the normal gaming state based on whether or not the short-time gaming flag is set to “ON”. If it is determined that the game is in the normal game state (S3509: YES), the normal symbol variation time is set to 12 seconds in S3510, and then the process proceeds to S3512. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not the normal game state (S3509: NO), that is, if the game state is the short time game state, the normal symbol variation time is set to 3 seconds in S3511, and then the process proceeds to S3512. The normal symbol variation time is a time for which the normal symbol display unit 4040 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner. The normal symbol variation time set here is temporarily stored in the main RAM 2501c.

  In S3512, the normal symbol change by the normal symbol display 4040 is started. In step S3513, measurement of elapsed time from the start of the variable display is started. On the other hand, in S3514 which is shifted to when the normal symbol is not changing, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol change is ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to end the normal symbol variation display based on whether or not the elapsed time when measurement was started in S3513 has reached the normal symbol variation time set in S3510 or S3511. To do. Here, when it is determined that the variation of the normal symbol is to be ended (S3514: YES), the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 4040 is terminated in S3515, and the winning symbol or the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. The process moves to S3516. On the other hand, if it is determined not to end the variation of the normal symbol (S3514: NO), the subsequent symbol processing is terminated without executing the subsequent processing.

  In S3516, the elapsed time is reset. This process is to reset the elapsed time when the measurement was started in the process of S3513. In S3517, as in S3506, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win. If it is determined that it is a win (S3517: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” in S3518, and then the normal symbol process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a hit (S3517: NO), the process of S3518 is not executed and the normal symbol process is terminated.

[Electric tulip treatment]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing details of the electric tulip process in S2605 of FIG.

  In the first S3601, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game flag is “ON”. If it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is “ON” (S3601: YES), the process proceeds to S3602. On the other hand, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not “ON” (S3601: NO), that is, when the auxiliary game flag is “OFF”, the subsequent processing is not executed, and the electric tulip End the process.

  In S3602, it is determined whether the electric tulip 2404 is operating. If it is determined that the electric tulip 2404 is operating (S3602: YES), the process proceeds to S3607. On the other hand, when it is determined that the electric tulip 2404 is not in operation (S3602: NO), the process proceeds to S3603.

  In S3603, it is determined whether it is a normal gaming state. This process is the same as S3509 in FIG. If it is determined that the game state is the normal game state (S3603: YES), an operation pattern is set in S3604, and then the process proceeds to S3606. In S3604, as an operation pattern of the electric tulip 2404, an operation pattern for performing the operation of opening the second starter 2403 twice for 0.1 seconds is set in the main RAM 2501c. Thereby, the opening for a total of 0.2 seconds is realized. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not the normal game state (S3603: NO), that is, if the game state is the short-time game state, the operation pattern is set in S3605, and then the process proceeds to S3606. In S3605, as an operation pattern of the electric tulip 2404, an operation pattern for performing the operation of opening the second starter 2403 for 0.5 seconds seven times is set in the main RAM 2501c. Thereby, the opening for 3.5 seconds is realized.

  In S3606, the operation of the electric tulip 2404 is started. This process starts the operation of the electric tulip 2404 with the operation pattern set in S3604 or S3605.

  In S3607, it is determined whether the operation is completed. If it is determined that the operation of the electric tulip 2404 has been completed (S3607: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “OFF” in S3608, and then the electric tulip process is terminated. Thereby, an auxiliary game is complete | finished. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation of the electric tulip 2404 has not been completed (S3607: NO), the process of S3608 is not executed and the electric tulip process is terminated.

[Big prize opening control process]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing details of the special winning opening opening control process in S2606 of FIG.

  In first S3701, it is determined whether or not the big hit game flag is set to “ON”. If it is determined that the big hit game flag is set to “ON” (S3701: YES), the process proceeds to S3702. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game flag is not set to “ON” (S3701: NO), that is, if the jackpot game flag is set to “OFF”, the subsequent processing is not executed. End the big prize opening control process.

  In S3702, it is determined whether the opening is in progress. For example, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is being opened based on whether or not the elapsed time after setting the opening command related to the jackpot game by the processing of S3405 has reached a predetermined opening time. is there. If it is determined that the opening is being performed (S3702: YES), the process proceeds to S3703. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening is not being performed (S3702: NO), the process proceeds to S3711.

  In S3703, it is determined whether the opening time has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S3703: YES), the process proceeds to S3704. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (S3703: NO), the subsequent process is not executed and the special winning opening opening control process is terminated.

  In S3704, an operation pattern is set. In this process, the round upper limit number Rmax (for example, “15” or “8”) and the operation pattern are determined and stored in the main RAM 2501c. By the processing of S3704, various times related to the big hit game such as the interval time between rounds and the next round, and the ending time after the end of the final round are also set.

  In S3705, the winning number Y of game balls to the big winning device 2406 is reset to “0”. In the subsequent S3706, the number R of big hits R stored in the main RAM 2501c is updated to a value obtained by adding “1”. The round number R is set to “0” before the start of the big hit, and is incremented by “1” every time the process of S3706 is executed.

  In S3707, opening control of the special winning opening is started. In subsequent S3708, measurement of an opening time that is an elapsed time since the opening control in S3707 is started is started. In the next S3709, a round start command is set. In this process, a round start command for notifying that a round game has started is set in the main RAM 2501c. After the process of S3709 ends, the process proceeds to S3716.

In S3711 which is shifted when it is determined that the opening is not being performed, it is determined whether or not the ending is being performed. This process determines, for example, whether or not the ending immediately after the end of the final round is in progress based on information indicating at which point in the big hit game the current state stored in the main RAM 2501c. If it is determined that ending is in progress (S3711: YES), the flow shifts to S3724. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending is not in progress (S3711: NO), the process proceeds to S3712.

  In S3712, it is determined whether the interval is in progress. For example, this process determines whether or not the current state stored in the main RAM 2501c is in the interval (between the rounds) based on the information indicating when the current state of the jackpot game is. To do. If it is determined that the interval is in effect (S3712: YES), the process proceeds to S3713. On the other hand, when it determines with it not being during an interval (S3712: NO), it transfers to S3714.

  In S3713, it is determined whether the interval time has elapsed. This process is to determine whether or not the interval time set by the process of S3704 has elapsed since the big winning device 2406 was closed at the end of the previous round. If it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (S3713: YES), the process proceeds to S3704 because it is time to start the next round. On the other hand, when it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (S3713: NO), the subsequent process is not executed, and the special winning opening opening control process is terminated.

  In S3714, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening detection switch 2506 is turned “ON”. The special winning opening detection switch 2506 is a switch for detecting the winning of a game ball in the special winning opening. In this process, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening detection switch 2506 is “ON” based on whether or not a detection signal is input from the special winning opening detection switch 2506 during the round. If it is determined that the big prize opening detection switch 2506 is “ON” (S3714: YES), it is judged that one game ball has won the big prize device 2406, and the game ball is won in S3715. The number Y is updated to a value obtained by adding “1”, and then the process proceeds to S3716. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special winning opening detection switch 2506 is not “ON” (S3714: NO), the process of S3715 is not executed, and the process proceeds to S3716.

  In S3716, it is determined whether the specified opening time has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning device 2406. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which the measurement is started by the process of S3708 has reached a specified opening time (29 seconds in the present embodiment) stored in advance in the main ROM 2501b. If it is determined that the specified opening time has elapsed (S3716: YES), the process proceeds to S3718 without executing the process of S3717. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specified release time has not elapsed (S3716: NO), the process proceeds to S3717.

  In S3717, it is determined whether or not the winning number Y has reached the winning upper limit number Ymax. In this process, the winning number Y of game balls in the current round stored in the main RAM 2501c is the maximum winning number Ymax (for example, “9”) that defines the closing timing of the big winning device 2406 stored in the main ROM 2501b in advance. ) Is determined. If Y = Ymax (S3717: YES), the flow shifts to S3718. On the other hand, if Y ≠ Ymax (S3717: NO), the subsequent process is not executed, and the special winning opening release control process is terminated.

  In S3718, the opening control of the special winning device 2406 is terminated. As a result, the special winning device 2406 is closed. In S3719, it is determined whether or not the round number R has reached the round upper limit number Rmax. If R = Rmax (S3719: YES), the process proceeds to S3721. On the other hand, if R ≠ Rmax (S3719: NO), the measurement of the interval time is started in S3720, and then the special winning opening release control process is terminated. The process of S3720 starts measuring the interval time, which is the elapsed time since the big winning device 2406 is closed, in order to control the start timing of the next round. This interval time is used for the processing of S3713.

  In S3721, the measurement of the ending time is started. In S3722, the round number R is reset to “0”. In S3723, an ending command is set in the main RAM 2501c. This ending command is a command for notifying that the final release of the big prize winning device 2406 has ended, and is transmitted to the effect control board 2520 by the transmission processing of S2609.

  In S3724, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the ending time when the measurement is started by the process of S3721 has reached the set ending time set by the process of S3704. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (S3724: YES), the process proceeds to S3725. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S3724: NO), the subsequent process is not executed and the special winning opening release control process is terminated.

  In S3725, a game state setting process is executed. The game state setting process sets the game state of the gaming machine 2301 after the big hit game ends. Details of the game state setting process will be described later.

  In S3726, the big hit game flag is turned “OFF”, and then the big prize opening control process is ended. By setting the jackpot game flag to “OFF”, the jackpot game ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing details of the game state setting processing in S3725 of FIG.

  In the first step S3801, the presence / absence of probability change is determined based on the big hit symbol. This process is based on the jackpot symbol set in S3204 of FIG. In S3802, it is determined based on the determination result in S3801 whether or not it is a probable big hit. Here, when it is determined that it is a probable big hit (S3802: YES), the process proceeds to S3803. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a probable big hit (S3802: NO), that is, if it is a normal big hit, the process proceeds to S3805.

  In S3803, the probability variation game flag is set to “ON”. The probability change game flag is stored in the main RAM 2501c, and is “ON” when the probability change game state is set, and is “OFF” when the normal game state is set.

  In S3804, the time-saving game flag is set to “ON”. The time saving game flag is stored in the main RAM 2501c, and is set to “ON” when the time saving gaming state is set, and is set to “OFF” when the non-time saving gaming status is set. After the process of S3804, the game state setting process is terminated.

  In S3805, which is shifted to when it is determined that the probability variation big hit is not, the probability variation game flag is set to “OFF”. In S3806, the short-time game flag is set to “ON”, and in S3807, “100” is set to the short-time fluctuation count W. Thereby, a game (a so-called short-time game) in which a decrease in the number of game balls in the low probability state is suppressed is awarded 100 times. After the process of S3807 is completed, the game state setting process is terminated.

[Status notification processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing details of the status notification processing in S2608 of FIG. In first S3901, it is determined whether or not the number of holds is “0”. This process is to determine whether or not the number T of the normal symbol determination and the number U1 and U2 of the special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 2501c are “0”. This is because, when the number of holds is “0”, there is a high possibility of being in a non-operating state. If it is determined that the number of holds is “0” (S3901: YES), the process proceeds to S3902. On the other hand, if the hold number is not “0” (S3901: NO), an operation command is set in S3906, and the state notification process is terminated. The operation command is a command indicating that the gaming machine 2301 is in an operation state, and is transmitted to the effect control board 2520 in S2609 of FIG.

  In S3902, it is determined whether or not it is changing. This process determines that the normal symbol or the special symbol is not changing. This is because when there is no change, there is a high possibility that the vehicle is not operating. If it is determined that the change is not occurring (S3902: YES), the flow shifts to S3903. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is changing (S3902: NO), an operation command is set in S3606, and the state notification process is terminated.

  In S3903, it is determined whether or not the probability variation game flag is “OFF”. In this process, it is determined whether or not the probability variation game flag stored in the main RAM 2501c is “OFF”, that is, the normal game state. In the case of a probable game state, there is a low possibility of being in a non-operating state. If it is determined that the probability variation game flag is “OFF” (S3903: YES), the flow shifts to S3904. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is “ON” (S3903: NO), an operation command is set in S3906, and the state notification process is terminated.

  In S3904, it is determined whether or not the time-saving game flag is “OFF”. In this process, it is determined whether or not the short-time game flag stored in the main RAM 2501c is “OFF”, that is, the non-short-time game state. In the case of the short-time gaming state, the possibility of being in the non-operating state is low. If it is determined that the time-saving game flag is “OFF” (S3904: YES), a non-operation command is set in S3905, and then the state notification process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the short-time game flag is “ON” (S3904: NO), an operation command is set in S3906, and the state notification process is terminated.

  Note that the non-operating command is a command indicating that the gaming machine 2301 is likely to be non-operating. The non-operation command set in S3905 is transmitted to the effect control board 2520 in S2609 in FIG.

<Embodiment B>
The display 2408 may be configured as in the embodiment B described below, instead of the embodiment a described above. Note that the configuration unique to the display 2408 of the embodiment B will be mainly described, and the description of the same configuration as the embodiment A will be basically omitted.

  The display 2408 of the embodiment B has a plurality of LEDs 4945 arranged in two rows. When displaying information related to the profits given to the player in the game only by the display 2408, these LEDs 4945 include the first and second special symbol displays 4900 and 4910, the first and second special symbol hold. A display 4901, 4911, a probability change display 4920, a time reduction display 4921, a right-handed display 4922, a jackpot round number display 4930, a normal symbol display 4940, and a normal symbol hold display 4941 are configured. The LEDs 4945 are arranged in two rows in parallel along the game ball launch path formed by the rails 2410a and 2410b. Note that the arrangement of the LEDs 4945 is not limited to this, and the LEDs 4945 may be arranged in one row along the launch path of the game balls, or may be arranged in three or more rows. They may be arranged regardless of the passage.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the indicator 2408 is disposed on the rear side of the covering member 4800 installed on the game board 2310, and the front side is covered with the covering member 4800. The covering member 4800 is a member that functions to close or fill the front and rear regions on the front side of the game board 2310, and is composed of a plate portion constituting the front surface and a wall portion extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the plate portion. It is in the shape of a box that opens to the center (FIG. 88). Here, the “front / rear area” is an area that can be provided to provide a game area 2312 through which a game ball passes on the front side of the plate member 2400. Parts such as a winning opening and a gate 2405 are arranged. The covering member 4800 is arranged so that the front surface thereof is substantially the same as the front ends of the rails 2410a and 2410b, and also serves as a board decoration when arranged outside the outer rail 2410a (game area 2312) as in this embodiment. There is. Note that in the case where the display 2408 is arranged inside the game area 2312, a part of the game parts installed in the game area 2312 such as the starter devices 2402 and 2403 and the big prize device may be configured by the covering member 4800. Good.

  The covering member 4800 has a portion covering the front side of the display 2408 that is transparent or translucent, or has an opening corresponding to the window 5106 or the like of the display 2408, so that the LED 4945 can be connected through the window 5106 from the front side. The state is configured to be visible. The covering member 4800 is attached to the plate member 2400 of the game board 2310 so as to be replaceable by screwing or the like. The indicator 2408 is attached to the covering member 4800 so as to be housed inside the covering member 4800. At this time, the display 2408 has a back side facing the back side of the game board 2310 (plate member 2400) and a back side of the game board 2310 with respect to a connector 5000 (FIG. 91) provided to face the back side. It becomes accessible from. As described above, the covering member 4800 can be attached to and detached from the plate member 2400 with the display 2408 attached, and the covering member 4800 can be easily replaced in accordance with replacement of the display 2408 or change of model. is there.

  Since the display 2408 is covered with the covering member 4800, it is difficult to access from the outside. Even if a fraudulent act is performed, it is possible to earn time until the display substrate 5100 is reached, and it is possible to make fraud more difficult.

  The display 2408 of this embodiment is detachably attached to the covering member 4800 by screwing or the like. Therefore, by removing the covering member 4800 from the plate member 2400, it is possible to easily replace the indicator 2408 when a failure occurs. Note that the display 2408 is attached to the covering member 4800 by adhesion or the like so that it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or when the display 2408 is removed from the covering member 4800. May be. In other words, the attachment structure of the display 2408 and the covering member 4800 has a structure that is difficult to remove without destroying the covering member 4800 or the display 2408, and the covering member 4800 or the display 2408 is broken or deformed by the removal. Thus, at least one of the configurations that cannot be assembled as in the original, the configuration in which the covering member 4800 or the indicator 2408 is broken or deformed by the removal, and the removal trace remains on the covering member 4800 or the indicator 2408. It may be.

  As shown in FIGS. 92, 93, and 94, the display 2408 includes a display substrate 5100 on which a plurality of LEDs 4945 are surface-mounted, and a cover member 5102 that covers at least the front side of the display substrate 5100. Yes. The display 2408 is installed in a standing posture such that the display substrate 5100 disposed on the rear side of the cover member 5102 is along the board surface of the game board 2310. The display 2408 is configured to be difficult or inaccessible from the outside with respect to the front surface of the display substrate 5100 by the cover member 5102. The display 2408 is attached to the covering member 4800, and the light of the LED 4945 can be visually recognized by the player through the covering member 4800. Further, the display 2408 can be accessed from the back side of the game board 2310 to the connector 5000 (FIG. 91) provided so that the back side faces the back side of the game board 2310 (plate member 2400) and faces the back side. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the display substrate 5100 has the same configuration as that of the embodiment A, and is a case where only the display 2408 displays information related to the profit given to the player in the game. The first special symbol indicator 4900 is composed of six LEDs 4945 on the left side of the upper row, and the second special symbol indicator 4910 is composed of six LEDs 4945 in the upper row. The first special symbol hold indicator 4901 is composed of two LEDs 4945 arranged between the first special symbol indicator 4900 and the second special symbol indicator 4910, and the second special symbol hold indicator 4911 is It consists of two LEDs 4945 on the right side of the second special symbol display 4910. On the right side of the second special symbol holding display 4911, the probability variation display 4920, the time reduction display 4921, and the right-handed display 4922 are arranged one by one in this order. The big hit round number display 4930 is composed of eight LEDs 4945 on the left side of the lower row, the normal symbol display 4940 is composed of three LEDs 4945 on the right side of the big hit round number display 4930, and the normal symbol hold indicator 4941 is , Composed of two LEDs 4945 from the right side of the lower row.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in this embodiment, current limiting means 5500 and 5600 for controlling the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4945 are provided on the main control board 2500 side. Note that the current control means 5500 and 5600 may be provided on the effect control board 2520 as long as the display 2408 is electrically connected to the effect control board 2520. As shown in FIG. 97, by mounting a resistor 5500 as current limiting means on the main control board 2500 and limiting the current flowing to the plurality of LEDs 4045 to be a predetermined value or less, an excessive current flows to each LED 4045. Is preventing. The resistor 5500 may be through-hole mounting in which the lead of the resistor 5500 is fixed to the hole of the printed board, but may be surface-mounted on the main control board 2500. Thereby, the main control board 2500 does not protrude a lead for connecting the resistor 5500 to the circuit on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the resistor 5500, and can effectively use the surface opposite to the mounting surface.

  The resistor 5500 may be disposed on the other surface opposite to the surface on which the electrical component of the main control board 2500 is mounted at a position corresponding to the mounting region of the electrical component. In this case, the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 5500 and the mounting area of the electronic component may be either completely overlapped or partially overlapped with the main control board 2500 sandwiched in the front-rear direction. By mounting the resistor 5500 on one surface of the main control board 2500, the mounting of the resistor 5500 does not affect the front surface of the display substrate 4200 like through-hole mounting. Thus, the main control board 2500 can be made more compact by effectively using both sides of the main control board 2500.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the current limiting means 5600 may be provided as a driver in the main control board 2500. The current limiting unit 5600 prevents the excessive current from flowing through each LED 4045 by limiting the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to be a predetermined value or less. Thus, by providing the current limiting means 5500, 5600 on the main control board 2500 side, the resistance of the display board 5100 can be eliminated or reduced, so that the display board 5100 can be made more compact and the display 2408 can be made compact. Can be reduced in size.

  90, 92, and 93, the cover member 5102 includes a front cover portion 5108 in which windows 5106 corresponding to the respective LEDs 4945 mounted on the surface of the display substrate 5100 are formed, and a front cover portion. A horizontal cover portion 5110 formed so as to rise to the rear side is provided at the periphery of 5108. The cover member 5102 is formed in a box shape opened rearward by the front cover portion 5108 and the horizontal cover portion 5110, and the display substrate 5100 is accommodated in an inner region surrounded by the front cover portion 5108 and the horizontal cover portion 5110. It is possible. When the display substrate 5100 is stored in the inner region of the cover member 5102, the display substrate 5100 is aligned with the open end (rear end) of the horizontal cover portion 5110 (this embodiment) or more than the open end. Located on the front cover portion 5108 side (front side), the entire display substrate 5100 is accommodated in the inner region of the cover member 5102. In other words, the cover member 5102 covers the front surface of the display substrate 5100 on which the LEDs 4945 are mounted with the front cover portion 5108, covers the peripheral surface of the display substrate 5100 with the horizontal cover portion 5110, and displays due to the presence of the cover member 5102. It is difficult to access the front surface and peripheral surface of the substrate 5100 from the outside. In the cover member 5102 of this embodiment, the inner region is formed to match a part of the outer edge of the display substrate 5100, and when the display substrate 5100 is stored in the inner region, the display substrate 5100 is formed on the inner surface of the horizontal cover portion 5110. The display substrate 5100 can be held so as not to be misaligned.

  In this manner, the display substrate 5100 is disposed in a state of being accommodated in the cover member 5102, so that it is difficult to access the display substrate 5100 from the front side or the lateral side, and illegal acts on the display substrate 5100 are prevented. can do. Further, even if it is attempted to remove the display substrate 5100, it is difficult to remove the display substrate 5100 from the cover member 5102 because it is difficult to access the display substrate 5100 as described above.

  As shown in FIGS. 92 and 96, the cover member 5102 has a window 5106 penetrating the front cover portion 5108 in the front-rear direction corresponding to the LED 4945, which is defined by a window defining portion 5112 formed in the front cover portion 5108. Has been. The window 5106 may be provided corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 4945 (this embodiment), or may be provided so as to correspond to two or more predetermined number of LEDs 4945 among the plurality of LEDs 4945. The window 5106 has a polygonal or circular shape such as a quadrangle (this embodiment) and is formed larger than the outer shape of the corresponding LED 4945 so that the corresponding one or more LEDs 4945 are entirely inside. Yes. In the cover member 5102, the windows 5106 are formed in two rows. When the cover member 5102 is disposed in a state where the front side of the display substrate 5100 is covered, each window 5106 is disposed at a position corresponding to each LED 4945. Thus, the lighting state of each LED 4945 facing each window 5106 can be viewed through the window 5106. The configuration of the window defining unit 5112 is the same as that of the embodiment a.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the cover member 5102 includes an alignment portion 5400 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the front cover portion 5108. The alignment unit 5400 is formed integrally with the window defining unit 5112 so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the window defining unit 5112 facing the front surface of the display substrate 5100. The alignment unit 5400 is configured to fit into the substrate hole 5300 (FIG. 95) formed in the display substrate 5100 so that the display substrate 5100 can be aligned with the cover member 5102. In the cover member 5102, a plurality of alignment portions 5400 are distributed and arranged separately from each other on the rear surface of the front cover portion 5108. Among the plurality of alignment portions 5400, there may be one formed away from the window defining portion 5112. Each alignment portion 5400 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The alignment portion 5400 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion 5112, and the rear end thereof is positioned rearward of the rear end of the lateral cover portion 5110 and protrudes from the cover member 5102.

  The display substrate 5100 includes a substrate hole 5300 formed so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction, and the substrate hole 5300 is also formed in a circle in accordance with the columnar alignment portion 5400. The substrate hole 5300 is set to have the same or slightly larger opening size as the outer shape of the alignment portion 5400. The alignment portion 5400 and the substrate hole 5300 are provided so as to correspond in number, position, and the like. The alignment portion 5400 is fitted into the substrate hole 5300, and the display substrate 5100 is relatively positioned in the inner region of the cover member 5102. Is defined. Therefore, the cover member 5102 and the display substrate 5100 are assembled in a state where they are positioned vertically and horizontally with each other by fitting the alignment portion 5400 and the substrate hole 5300. The positional relationship between the alignment unit 5400 and the connector 5000 is the same as that in the embodiment (a).

  As described above, the cover member 5102 and the display substrate 5100 are assembled in a state of being positioned with each other by fitting the alignment portion 5400 and the substrate hole 5300, so that the LED 4945 and the window 5106 corresponding thereto are assembled. Alignment can be performed without deviation, and the state of the LED 4945 can be identified more suitably. In addition, since the alignment unit 5400 is formed integrally with the window defining unit 5112 and is reinforced by the window defining unit 5112, the alignment unit 5400 may be configured to protrude rearward from the window defining unit 5112. Can be avoided. By forming the alignment portion 5400 integrally with the window defining portion 5112, the projecting dimension can be shortened, and breakage or deformation of the alignment portion 5400 can be more preferably avoided.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the cover member 5102 and the display substrate 5100 are assembled by an engagement structure that melts the alignment portion 5400 and engages the display substrate 5100. After the assembly, the cover member 5102 and the display substrate 5100 are difficult to remove from each other. When reassembly is difficult, or when disassembled, the cover member 5102 and the display substrate 5100 are configured to leave a trace of removal. Specifically, when the alignment portion 5400 and the substrate hole 5300 are fitted together, the tip of the alignment portion 5400 protruding from the rear surface of the display substrate 5100 is melted so as to be larger than the substrate hole 5300. By crushing, a latching portion 5400a is formed at the tip of the alignment portion 5400. The display substrate 5100 is sandwiched between the rear end of the window defining portion 5112 and the hooking portion 5400a of the alignment portion 5400 and fixed to the cover member 5102.

  As described above, according to the engagement structure described above, it is difficult to remove the display substrate 5100 from the cover member 5102, and the display substrate 5100 is protected by the cover member 5102, thereby preventing illegal acts on the display substrate 5100. it can. In addition, when the latching portion 5400a is destroyed and the display substrate 5100 is forcibly removed from the cover member 5102, traces of the latching portion 5400a remaining on the cover member 5102 remain, and it is found that there has been an illegal act. Becomes easier. Furthermore, when the display substrate 5100 is forcibly removed from the cover member 5102, the latching portion 5400 a is broken, and the display substrate 5100 cannot be reattached to the cover member 5102, making reassembly difficult.

  As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, on the front side of the cover member 5102, an identification unit 5120 that can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 4945 individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4945 is arranged. The identification means 5120 may be an arrangement associated with the display by the LED 4945 or the LED 4945 such as only the cover member 5102, only the covering member 4800, or dispersedly provided on the cover member 5102 and the covering member 4800. In addition, the identification unit 5120 may be any of a configuration that is attached to the front surface or the rear surface of the cover member 5102 or the covering member 4800, a configuration that is provided inside the cover member 5102 or the covering member 4800, and the like. The identification means 5120 of this embodiment includes a first identification unit 5122 provided on the front surface of the cover member 5102 and a second identification unit 5124 provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, and the front side of the first identification unit 5122. The second identification part 5124 is arranged so as to overlap. As shown in FIG. 87, the identification unit 5120 includes a third identification unit 4802 provided separately from the second identification unit 5124 on the front surface of the covering member 4800.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the first identification unit 5122 is provided on the front side of the window 5106, and a transmission unit 5126 serving as a first region that can transmit light or influence transmitted light, and the transmission unit 5126 A shielding portion 5128 is provided as a second region that is provided around and is less likely to transmit light than the transmission portion 5126. The first identification unit 5122 of this embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the cover member 5102. The first identification unit 5122 is preferably formed in a shape that matches the front surface area of the cover member 5102 where the window 5106 opens. In the present embodiment, the first identification unit 5122 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the cover member 5102. Has been. In the present embodiment, the first identification portion 5122 and the cover member 5102 are bonded by the adhesive layer provided on the first identification portion 5122. However, the size of the first identification portion 5122 and the attachment to the cover member 5102 The method is not limited to this. Note that the first identification unit 5122 may include a combination region that indicates a combination of light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4945 as in the case of the embodiment A.

  The transmission part 5126 is located on the front side of the window 5106 of the cover member 5102 and can transmit light emitted from the LED 4945 corresponding to the window 5106. The transmission part 5126 is provided so as to cover the entire front side opening of the window 5106, and the front side opening of the window 5106 is covered by the transmission part 5126 on the front side of the window 5106. The transmitting portion 5126 may be configured to be transparent, or may be configured to affect the transmitted light so that the LED 4045 disposed inside the window 5106 cannot be directly seen from the front side. Here, “influence on light” means, for example, an aspect that makes the LED 4945 difficult to visually recognize by making it translucent, an aspect that colors the light emitted from the LED 4945 by making it colored, A mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4945 is diffused to show a large size, a mode in which the light is focused and the light emitted from the LED 4945 is shown in a small size, a mode in which these are combined, etc. Light is diffused by the transmission portion 5126. The transmission part 5126 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the cover member 5102, and is arranged according to the plurality of windows 5106 provided on the cover member 5102. Is provided. That is, the first identifying portion 5122 is formed with a transmissive portion 5126 having a square shape matching the window 5106 and the same size as the window 5106, and the front opening of the window 5106 is closed without a gap by the transmissive portion 5126. .

  As described above, since the front side of the window 5106 is covered with the transmissive portion 5126, it is possible to make it difficult to access the LED 4945 mounted on the surface of the display substrate 5100 from the front side of the display 2408. In other words, the transmissive portion 5126 can prevent an illegal act from being performed on the display substrate 5100 through the window 5106 that penetrates to the inside of the cover member 5102. In addition, since the light emitted from the LED 4945 can be adjusted by the transmissive portion 5126, the state of the LED 4945 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LEDs 4945 can be easily distinguished.

  Around the transmissive portion 5126, a shielding portion 5128 is provided that is configured such that light is less likely to pass through the transmissive portion 5126 that covers the window 5106. In other words, the shielding portion 5128 is disposed so as to surround the window 5106 on the front side of the cover member 5102. The shielding part 5128 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmission part 5126, and in this embodiment, a part other than the transmission part 5126 is configured in one sheet constituting the first identification part 5122. The shielding portion 5128 is disposed so as to overlap with a region other than the window 5106 on the front surface of the front cover portion 5108 of the cover member 5102, and does not cover the inside of the window 5106. The shielding unit 5128 is composed of a dark color such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black, or a cold color such as amber, or the like, and has a low brightness level (which absorbs light well). Is different.

  Thus, since the shielding part 5128 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the transmissive part 5126, the transmissive part 5126 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 4945 recognized through the transmissive part 5126 is further improved. It becomes easy to distinguish. Further, even if the window 5106 and the transmission portion 5126 are misaligned, it is difficult to understand that the window 5106 is not visible because it is not directly visible. In addition, if the transmission part 5126 is placed on the window 5106, the transmission part 5126 surrounded by the shielding part 5128 shines, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4945 can be reduced.

  In addition, the shielding part 5128 is not limited to the configuration in which the transmission part 5126 is set to the same sheet, but the front surface of the front cover part 5108 of the cover member 5102 is set as the shielding part 5128, and the transparent part of the sheet is interposed therebetween. Alternatively, other configurations such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 5128 appears on the front side by not arranging the sheet on the front side of the shielding portion 5128 may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 93, the first identification unit 5122 is arranged to overlap the first layer 5130 on the front side of the area other than the window 5106 in the cover member 5102 and the first layer 5130 that easily transmits light. And a second layer 5131 that is less likely to transmit light than 5130. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmission portion 5126 is configured only by the first layer 5130 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128 that is difficult to transmit light is between the first layer 5130 and the second layer 5131. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 5131, light is difficult to transmit in the stacking direction (thickness direction), and light is prevented from transmitting from the shielding portion 5128. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 5130 is disposed on the cover member 5102 side (rear side), and the second layer 5131 is disposed on the front side (front side). The first identification unit 5122 is obtained by, for example, laminating the second layer 5131 on a sheet made of the first layer 5130 by painting, printing, or the like, and can be visually recognized between the transmission unit 5126 and the shielding unit 5128. There is no step.

  By configuring the first identification portion 5122 in this manner, even if the window 5106 and the transmission portion 5126 are misaligned, light can be guided to the transmission portion 5126 by the first layer 5130, and the shielding portion 5128. Since the transmissive portion 5126 surrounded by the light shines, the influence on the identification of the LED 4945 can be reduced. In addition, in the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128, the light incident on the first layer 5130 is blocked by the second layer 5131 on the front side and does not leak to the front side, so that the transmission portion 5126 can be clearly identified.

  As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the second identification portion 5124 is located on the front side of the window 5106 and is attached to the covering member 4800. The second identification unit 5124 is provided on the front side of the window 5106, and is provided around the light transmission unit 5132 and the light transmission unit 5132 as a first region that can transmit light or influence the transmitted light. The light-shielding part 5134 as a 2nd area | region which is hard to permeate | transmit light rather than the light transmission part 5132 is provided. In addition, the second identification unit 5124 may include a combination area 4804 that is displayed on the light shielding unit 5134 and indicates the light emission mode of two or more LEDs 4945 as a combination. The second identification portion 5124 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. The second identification unit 5124 is formed in accordance with the range of the plurality of windows 5106, and the front side of the plurality of windows 5106 is covered by one second identification unit 5124. In the present embodiment, the second identification portion 5124 and the covering member 4800 are bonded by the adhesive layer of the second identification portion 5124. It is not limited to this.

  The light passing portion 5132 of the present embodiment is located on the front side of the window 5106 of the cover member 5102 so that the light emitted from the LED 4945 corresponding to the window 5106 can be transmitted or the transmitted light is affected. It has become. The light passing portion 5132 is provided so as to cover at least the entire front opening of the window 5106, and the state of the LED 4945 can be visually recognized through the window 5106 by the light passing portion 5132 on the front side of the window 5106. The light passing portion 5132 of this embodiment is configured to be transparent and formed in a range corresponding to the plurality of windows 5106. Note that the light transmitting unit 5132 may be configured to affect the transmitted light, similarly to the transmitting unit 5126 of the first identifying unit 5122. Then, by adjusting the light emitted from the LED 4945 by the light passing portion 5132, the state of the LED 4945 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LEDs 4945 can be easily distinguished.

  Around the light passing portion 5132, there is provided a light shielding portion 5134 configured such that light is less likely to pass than the light passing portion 5132 that covers the window 5106. In other words, the light shielding portion 5134 is disposed on the front side of the cover member 5102 so as to surround the window 5106. The light shielding portion 5134 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the light passing portion 5132, and in this embodiment, a portion other than the light passing portion 5132 is configured in one sheet constituting the second identifying portion 5124. The light shielding portion 5134 is disposed so as to overlap the area other than the window 5106 on the front side of the cover member 5102, and does not cover the inside of the window 5106. The light shielding unit 5134 is configured by a dark color with a low degree of brightness (which absorbs light well), such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black, or a cold color such as amber, and the color of the light transmitting unit 5132 Is different.

  As described above, since the light blocking portion 5134 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the light passing portion 5132, the light passing portion 5132 can be easily understood, and the LED 4945 recognized through the light passing portion 5132 can be recognized. The situation becomes easier to distinguish. Further, even if the window 5106 and the light transmitting portion 5132 are misaligned, it can be difficult to understand that they are misaligned.

  Note that the light shielding unit 5134 is not limited to the configuration in which the light transmitting unit 5132 is set to the same sheet, and the front surface of the covering member 4800 corresponding to the front side of the window 5106 is set as the light shielding unit 5134 so that the transparent portion of the sheet Other configurations such as a configuration in which the light shielding portion 5134 appears on the front side by not arranging the sheet via the front side of the light shielding portion 5134 may be used. The cover member 4800 may have an opening corresponding to the window 5106, and the opening may be blocked by the second identification portion 5124 (the light transmitting portion 5132 and / or the light shielding portion 5134).

  The combination area 4804 is partitioned by a partition mark 4806 including a frame line (this embodiment) displayed on the light shielding portion 5134. The division mark 4806 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of light passing portions 5132, and the combination area 4804 surrounded by the division mark 4806 can be recognized separately from other areas. For example, the first and second special symbol displays 4900 and 4910, the first and second special symbol hold displays 4901 and 4911, the probability variation display 4920, the time reduction display 4921, the right-handed display 4922, the jackpot round number display Among these, in the 4930, the normal symbol display 4940, and the normal symbol hold display 4941, a plurality of LEDs 4945 (the transmission unit 5126 or the light transmission unit 5132) constitute the display unit. A group of (the transmitting portion 5126 or the light transmitting portion 5132) is surrounded by a partition mark 4806 to form a combination region 4804 corresponding to each display. Note that the section mark 4806 is not limited to the form of the frame line, and may be any structure that can recognize that it is distinguished from other areas, such as adding characters or changing the color in the combination area 4804. .

  Specifically, the combination area 4804 corresponding to the first special symbol display 4900 is displayed by being surrounded by the division mark 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4945 on the left side of the upper row. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4910 is displayed by being surrounded by a partition mark 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4845 in the upper row. A combination corresponding to the first special symbol hold indicator 4901, surrounded by a partition mark 4806 so as to correspond to two LEDs 4945 arranged between the first special symbol indicator 4900 and the second special symbol indicator 4910. An area 4804 is displayed. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol hold indicator 4911 is displayed by being surrounded by a partition mark 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4945 on the right side of the second special symbol indicator 4910. Further, a combination area 4804 corresponding to the jackpot round number display 4930 is displayed so as to be surrounded by the division mark 4806 so as to correspond to the eight LEDs 4945 on the left side of the lower row. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol display 4940 is displayed by surrounding it with the division mark 4806 so as to correspond to the three LEDs 4945 on the right side of the big hit round number display 4930. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol hold indicator 4941 is displayed by being surrounded by a partition mark 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4945 from the right side of the lower row.

  Thus, by displaying the combination area 4804, the states of the LEDs 4945 in the area are associated and recognized, and the player can easily recognize information by the combination of the LEDs 4945.

  As shown in FIG. 93, the second identification unit 5124 is disposed so as to overlap the front side of the first layer 5136 in addition to the first layer 5136 that easily transmits light and the region corresponding to the window 5106. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 5138 that is less likely to transmit light than 5136. In other words, the light transmitting portion 5132 corresponding to the window 5106 is configured only by the first layer 5136 that transmits light, and the portions corresponding to the light shielding portion 5134 that is difficult to transmit light are the first layer 5136 and the second layer 5138. It is comprised by the laminated part. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 5138, it is difficult to transmit light as a whole and prevents light from being transmitted from the light shielding portion 5134. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 5136 is disposed on the rear side, and the second layer 5138 is disposed on the front side (front side). The second identification unit 5124 is obtained by, for example, laminating the second layer 5138 on a sheet made of the first layer 5136 by painting, printing, or the like, and is visible between the light transmission unit 5132 and the light shielding unit 5134. There is no step.

  The third identification unit 4802 is an area where various types of information are displayed. In the present embodiment, the third identification unit 4802 is attached to the covering member 4800 in the same manner as the second identification unit 5124. The third identification portion 4802 is formed in a sheet shape, and is disposed on the front surface of the covering member 4800 at a position different from the second identification portion 5124 (upper side in the present embodiment). In the third identification unit 4802, the displayed information is visible to the player. In the present embodiment, the third identification portion 4802 and the covering member 4800 are bonded by the adhesive layer of the third identification portion 4802. However, the size of the third identification portion 4802, the attachment method to the covering member 4800, etc. It is not limited to this. Further, the information displayed by the third identification unit 4802 may be displayed on the second identification unit 5124 or the first identification unit 5122 or may be displayed separately from the identification unit 5120, and the third identification unit 4802 may be omitted. .

  As described above, by providing the third identification unit 4802, more information can be displayed, and the information displayed on the display 2408 can be more easily understood. Further, by dividing each information and sorting and displaying it on a plurality of identification units 4802, 5122, 5124, it is possible to flexibly cope with changes such as when changing models.

  The identification units 4802, 5122, and 5124 (identification means 5120) may be configured to cover the peripheral surface with a protection unit 4808 (FIG. 88). In the present embodiment, a protective portion 4808 is provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, the peripheral surface of the second identifying portion 5124 attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800, and the third identifying portion attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. Each peripheral surface of 4802 is covered with a protective portion 4808. Specifically, the protection portion 4808 is configured by a wall extending in the front-rear direction in a recess formed in accordance with the shape of the identification portion 4802, 5124 corresponding to the attachment position of the identification portion 4802, 5124. Yes. Further, the concave portion of the covering member 4800 has a depth approximately equal to the thickness of the identification portions 4802 and 5124. The protective portion 4808 faces the circumferential surface of the identification portions 4802 and 5124 fitted and attached to the concave portions, and the identification portion. The entire peripheries of 4802 and 5124 are surrounded by a protection unit 4808.

  Thus, by covering the peripheral surfaces of the identification units 4802 and 5124 with the protection unit 4808, it is possible to make it difficult for the protection unit 4808 to access the identification units 4802 and 5124. Removal of 4802 and 5124 can be prevented. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an illegal act such as replacing the identification units 4802 and 5124 or removing the identification units 4802 and 5124 to access the display substrate 5100. Further, the identification units 4802 and 5124 can be aligned by attaching the identification units 4802 and 5124 to the covering member 4800 with the protection unit 4808 as a reference. In particular, since the second identification unit 5124 overlapping the front side of the window 5106 can be arranged without deviation, the state of the LED 4945 can be more appropriately determined.

  In this embodiment, the protection unit 4808 is provided corresponding to the entire circumference of the identification units 4802, 5124. However, the protection unit 4808 is provided on a part of the peripheral surface of the identification units 4802, 5122, 5124 (identification means 5120). The structure provided correspondingly may be sufficient.

  The information displayed by the identification means 5120 includes a game state that assists or explains information (may be referred to as game state information in the explanation) that is displayed on the display 2408 and that is related to the benefit given to the player in the game. Display, unique display indicating unique information such as model name, the probability of gaming machine 2301 (for example, 1/399), the probability of gaming machine 2301 (for example, 80/100), and the number of rounds per jackpot ( For example, spec display indicating spec information such as 16R, 4R, etc. may be displayed alone or in combination. In addition, these displays are described by printing or other methods visible to the player.

  For example, as the game state display, as in the embodiment described above, by forming the combination area 4804 surrounded by the division mark 4806, the states of the plurality of LEDs 4945 in the combination area 4804 are associated and recognized as combinations, The game state information displayed by a combination of a plurality of LEDs 4945 may be easily identified and assisted.

  FIG. 87 is an explanation showing an example of the game state display applied corresponding to the big hit round number display 4930, and the same components as those in the embodiment B are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. For example, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the game status display 4810 includes a jackpot at a position that is known to correspond to the jackpot round number display 4930, such as a position corresponding to the side of the jackpot round number display 4930. The pattern which represents the round number display 4930 typically, and the structure which describes the display mode and round number of LED4945 for every round may be sufficient. The game status display 4810 in FIG. 89A describes the game status information (number of rounds) displayed by a combination of the plurality of LEDs 4945 of the big hit round number display 4930. Therefore, by referring to the game status display 4810 in FIG. 89 (a), it is possible to easily identify the game status information (number of rounds) indicated by the big hit round number display 4930.

  Further, as the game status display 4810, signs such as numerals and symbols are arranged corresponding to the LED 4945 at positions corresponding to the sides of the LED 4945 (FIG. 89 (b)) or on the front side (FIG. 89 (c)). The sign may be configured to assist the recognition of the state of the LED 4945 as a combination, or to explain the state of the LED 4945. The label may be a color or a shape difference.

  The identification unit 5120 is divided into a first identification unit 5122 provided in the cover member 5102 and a second identification unit 5124 provided in the covering member 4800 as a configuration corresponding to the front side of the window 5106. Since the functions required of the identification unit 5120 can be assigned to the two identification units 5122 and 5124, the configuration of the identification units 5122 and 5124 can be simplified. In addition, by assigning and setting the functions required for the identification unit 5120 to the two identification units 5122 and 5124, the state of the LED 4945 can be more clearly distinguished, and the state of the LED 4945 can be more easily understood. In addition, by arranging the first identification unit 5122 and the second identification unit 5124 so as to overlap each other, a synergistic effect that is difficult with one sheet can be obtained due to the overlap of the two identification units 5122 and 5124.

  Since the covering member 4800 is attached to the game board 2310 so as to be replaceable, when the model is changed, if the covering member 4800 is removed from the game board 2310 and replaced, the identification portions 4802 and 5124 provided on the covering member 4800 are replaced. It can be easily exchanged. If the unique display and the specification display are performed by the covering member 4800, another model can be handled by replacing the covering member 4800. Further, since the first identification unit 5122 is provided on the cover member 5102, it is not affected by the replacement of the covering member 4800.

<Embodiment C>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the display 2408 of the embodiment C is different. Therefore, a configuration unique to the display 2408 of this embodiment will be described, and a description of a configuration similar to that of the other embodiments will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the display 2408 is composed of one or a plurality of display units. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the display unit 5700 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the display portion 5700 as viewed from the bottom side.

  The display portion 5700 includes a cover member 5710, a display substrate 5800 on which 10 LEDs are surface-mounted, and the like. The cover member 5710 includes a plate-like pedestal portion 5730 that forms the bottom of the cover member 5710, and a triangular prism-shaped protrusion 5720 that protrudes from the pedestal portion 5730. The corners of the side surfaces of the protruding portion 5720 are chamfered, and the display portion 5700 is arranged with the top of the protruding portion 5720 facing the player.

  In the protruding portion 5720, ten light guide hole portions 5740 are formed as windows penetrating the protruding portion 5720 along the protruding direction. Further, the pedestal portion 5730 of the cover member 5710 is attached to the display substrate 5800 so as to cover the surface thereof, and each light guide hole 5740 corresponds to an LED surface-mounted on the surface of the display substrate 5800. Arranged in position. Accordingly, the lighting state of each LED can be visually recognized from the top side of the protruding portion 5720 through the light guide hole 5740.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the display substrate 5800, a connector 5810 wired to the surface-mounted LED is provided (see FIG. 100), and the LED and the main control board 2500 are connected via the connector 5810. Connected.

  The display substrate 5800 is welded to the pedestal portion 5730 of the cover member 5710, whereby the display substrate 5800 is difficult to remove, reassemble, and disassemble with respect to the cover member 5710. 5700 or the display substrate 5800 is attached with a trace remaining.

  Note that the method for attaching the display substrate 5800 to the cover member 5710 (the pedestal portion 5730) is not limited to this, and for example, by attaching using a caulking, an adhesive, or the like, The cover member 5710 or the display substrate 5800 may be attached in a state in which a trace remains when it is difficult to remove, reassemble, and disassemble.

  Further, the shape of the protruding portion 5720 is not limited to the triangular prism shape, but may be various shapes such as a cylindrical shape and a quadrangular prism shape. In this embodiment, as an example, 10 LEDs are surface-mounted on the display substrate 5800, and 10 light guide hole portions 5740 corresponding to each LED are formed in the cover member 5710. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of LEDs and a light guide hole.

  The display 2408 is composed of one or a plurality of display units 5700, and displays information relating to the benefits given to the player in the game, as in the case of the embodiment a. FIG. 101 is a front view of each display unit 5700 when the display 2408 is configured by four display units 5700 as an example. These display units 5700 may be arranged together in the lower left of the game area 2312 adjacent to the outer rail 2410a, or may be separately arranged around the game area 2312, as in the embodiment A.

  The display unit 5700 of FIG. 101A is configured as a first special symbol holding display 5900 composed of four LEDs and a first special symbol display 5910 composed of six LEDs.

  In addition, the display unit 5700 in FIG. 101B is configured as a second special symbol hold display 5920 composed of four LEDs and a second special symbol display 5930 composed of six LEDs. .

  Further, the display portion 5700 of FIG. 101 (C) is composed of a normal symbol hold display 5940 composed of four LEDs, a normal symbol display 5950 composed of three LEDs, and one LED. The probability variation display 5960, the time reduction display 5970, and the right-handed display 5980 are configured.

  In addition, the display portion 5700 in FIG. 101D is configured as a big hit round number display 5990 including 10 LEDs. Of course, these are examples of the configuration of the display 2408, and the display 2408 may be configured by one or a plurality of display units 5700. In addition, a special symbol hold indicator, a special symbol indicator, a normal symbol hold indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a jackpot round number indicator, or the like may be configured by a plurality of display units 5700.

<Other embodiments>
As described above, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the technical scope thereof.

  In the above-described embodiment, the LED is exemplified as the means for displaying the game state information on the display (display means). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an organic EL or other light emitter may be used. In addition, as a light-emitting body, it is desirable from a viewpoint of compacting etc. that surface mounting is possible.

  The display board is not limited to a plate shape, and may be any display board (display means) provided with the above-described light emitter as means for displaying game state information. In the display device (display means), a structure in which a light emitter is mounted and a circuit for the light emitter is provided can also be referred to as a light emitter.

  In the embodiment described above, the configuration in which the cover member of the display (display means) is covered with the covering member is illustrated, but a covering member provided on the game board may be used as the cover member of the display. Further, the cover member of the display (display means) may be used as the covering member. A structure that covers at least the front side of the display substrate (light emitting means) and protects the display substrate (light emitting means), refers to both the covering member and the cover member, or one of the covering member and the cover member, and serves as the covering means. Can be caught.

  In the embodiment described above, an example has been described in which an identification unit is provided corresponding to the display unit (display unit) to help identify game state information displayed by the state of the LED of the display unit (display unit). Not limited. For example, an information display unit may be provided that displays or displays the above-described unique display or spec display, which has a direct relationship with or adjacent to the display device (display means) and is not directly related to the game state information. Therefore, the front side of the display (display means) and the front side of the window may be covered. As described above, an information display unit may be provided instead of or in addition to the above-described mode of displaying the unique display or the spec display on the identification unit.

  The identification means is not limited to be configured so that the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs can be identified individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs, and the display unit (display unit) corresponds to the display unit (display unit). Any configuration may be used as long as it assists in identifying the game state information displayed by the LED state. As an identification mode, an information auxiliary mode that makes it easy to grasp the meaning of the state of the LED by providing a label or the like corresponding to the LED, or a relationship between the first region that transmits light and the second region that hardly transmits light As described above, a discrimination assisting mode including a single unit or a combination thereof is included, such as a mode in which the state of the LED is easily discriminated (easily viewed). In particular, the information assisting mode can be distinguished and referred to as an information assisting unit, and the discrimination assisting mode can be distinguished and referred to as a discrimination assisting unit.

  In the display device (display means), the configuration arranged on the front side of the window is not limited to the above-described identification means, and is a protective means that is disposed so as to cover the window and prevents fraud through the window. May be. For example, in addition to the identification means, a protective means made of a transparent light-transmitting sheet is provided on the cover member, the covering member, or the identification means itself, or the transparent means can transmit light instead of the identification means. Protective means made of a simple sheet can be provided on the cover member or the covering member.

  The display (display means) is connected to a control means such as a main control board or an effect control board, and is given to the player according to a display mode of individual or combination of a plurality of light emitters according to a signal from the control means. It can be said that the information relating to the profit (special symbol, number of rounds of the big hit game: game state information) is displayed. The indicator (display means) repeats lighting and extinction of a plurality of light emitters in a predetermined pattern during the symbol variation period, and is determined in advance among the plurality of light emitters immediately after the end of symbol variation or at a timing after the predetermined period. By turning on and off the light emitters corresponding to the formed patterns, display by individual light emitters or combination display by a plurality of light emitters can be performed, and these displays can be performed in a plurality of patterns.

  The display mode displayed directly or indirectly (such as the above-mentioned identification means) by printing on the covering member, and the arrangement of each special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of jackpot game, etc. on the display (display means) By changing both or one of the controls and / or one of the controls, the display device (display means) may be shared by different models.

  The display (display means) can be installed in the front and back area (glass side position) between the front of the game area of the game board (cell image position) and the height direction of the launch rail, and placed on the front of the game board If it is in a range that can be visually recognized through the glazed glass, a member that forms a game area in which the game ball can flow down in the game area (the front and back area using a predetermined space of the winning device or the center player) or the game area (It may be a rail or a resin.) Or outside the gaming area (outside the outer rail) Similarly, a covering member may be installed at these positions.

  Specifically, for example, the gaming machine of the embodiment is configured as one type of pachinko gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display device of the embodiment described above can be used for various types of pachinko gaming machines. Can be installed.

  In addition, for example, in the above-described embodiment, the display is connected to the effect control board, and the effect control board is information related to the benefits given to the player by the display based on the information acquired from the main control board. It is good also as a structure which displays.

  In addition, as a display connected to the main control board for performing various lotteries, reel control, etc. in the spinning-type game machine, a display having the same configuration as the display of the above-described embodiment is provided. Information regarding the profits given to the player in the game with the swing type gaming machine may be displayed. Attach the back surface of the display board with the LED mounted on the front surface to the casing of the revolving game machine, etc., so that it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or leave a trace when disassembled. A cover member that covers the surface of the substrate may be provided. Then, the display device may display information related to the benefits given to the player in the game with the spinning-type game machine.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the board case for storing the control board is configured by combining two case members, and the control board is in a storage space formed by combining the control board storage portions of these case members. Stored. However, for example, there remains a possibility that fraudulent acts on the control board or the board case are performed, and the interest of the player may be reduced.

◆ [Invention A]
The gaming machine (1A) of the invention A is an identification that is a part provided with a control board (501), a case part (1303) containing the control board, and an identification display (520) provided in the case part. A display unit (1390), wherein the identification display is formed inside a member forming the identification display unit.

  In this case, for example, the identification display is less likely to be removed than when the identification display is formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of cheating can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved. Further, when the identification display is removed due to fraud, a scratch is formed on the case portion. Therefore, the inspector can easily find fraud. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  The gist of the gaming machine of the invention A is that the identification display is divided and provided in a plurality of layers (1381, 1382, 1383, 1384) in the thickness direction in the identification display section.

  In this case, it is difficult to remove the identification display as compared with the case where the identification display is formed in only one layer. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In the case portion of the gaming machine of the invention A, the thickness of the identification display portion is larger than the thickness of the portion (1391) outside the identification display portion.

  In the case part, it is necessary to sharpen the case part more deeply when an unauthorized person tries to remove the identification display compared to the case where the thickness of the identification display part is equal to or less than the thickness of the part outside the identification display part. For this reason, it is easy to produce a damage | wound in a case part. For this reason, the inspector can easily find an illegal act. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention B]
The gaming machine (1A) of the invention B is provided with a control board (501), a case part (3A, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303) enclosing the control board, and an identification display (520) And a position display unit (541) which is a part for displaying a position for providing the position.

  In this case, compared with the case where the position display unit is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display attached to the case unit. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine, the manufacturer can easily grasp the position to which the identification display is given, compared to the case where the position display unit is not provided. For this reason, when an identification display is provided by the manufacturer, the possibility that the identification display is provided at different positions among the plurality of gaming machines can be reduced. For this reason, compared with the case where the position display part is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display attached to the case part. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  The gist of the gaming machine of the invention B is that the position display portion is a convex portion or a concave portion formed on the inner surface (532) or the outer surface (531) of the case portion.

  For this reason, for example, compared with the case where the position display unit is displayed on the plane of the case unit by printing or the like, the inspector can easily grasp the position of the identification display. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display attached to the case portion. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. For this reason, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the invention B includes storage means (502) in which stored contents that affect the result of the game provided on the control board are stored, and the position display section is connected to the storage means in the case section. The gist is that it is provided in a part different from the part overlapping with.

  In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the identification display attached to the position display unit and the storage means overlap. Therefore, the inspector can confirm both the identification display and the storage means at the same time. Therefore, for example, it can be easily found that the storage means has been replaced by an illegal act. For this reason, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention C]
A gaming machine (1A) of the invention C includes a control board (501) for controlling a game, a storage means (502) for storing storage contents mounted on the control board and used for controlling the game, and the storage means. A transmissive storage part (3A, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303) that is visible and difficult to contact, and a first information identification part (523) attached to the storage part for identifying the control board, A second information identification unit (524) attached to the storage unit for identifying the storage unit, wherein the first and second information identification units are displayed including at least the same identification display (529). In addition, the first information identification unit displays the mounting location of the storage means without hindering visibility.

  In this case, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent act is not performed by confirming the storage unit and the storage unit on which the same identification display is displayed. In addition, for example, even if the storage means is replaced with another storage means due to fraud, the inspector can determine whether or not the identification indications attached to the storage means and the storage unit are the same. , You can easily confirm that the cheating was done. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of cheating can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  The gaming machine of the invention C further includes a third information identification unit (501) displayed on the control board for specifying the control board, and the first, second, and third information identification units are at least the same identification. The gist is that it is displayed including the display.

  In this case, the inspector can easily confirm that the cheating is not performed by checking the control board, the storage unit, and the storage unit on which the same identification display is displayed. In addition, even if at least one of the control board and the storage means is replaced with another control board and the storage means due to fraud, whether the identification display attached to the control board, the storage means, and the storage unit is the same. By judging whether or not, the inspector can easily confirm that the illegal act has been performed. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of cheating can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention D]
The gaming machine (1A) of the invention D includes a control board (501) and a case portion (3A, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303) including a plurality of members (511) containing the control board. The gist is that at least two of the substrate and the plurality of members are provided with associated identification (520).

  In this case, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not fraudulent acts are performed by confirming the identification display given to at least two of the control board and the plurality of members. For example, even when the control board is replaced with another control board by fraud, it is determined whether or not the identification display attached to at least two of the control board and the plurality of members is related. Thus, the inspector can easily confirm that the illegal act has been performed. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of cheating can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the invention D, the plurality of members include a first member (45A) and a second member (40A) that forms an inner packet part that includes the control board by being combined with the first member. The identification display is provided on at least two of the control board, the first member, and the second member.

  In this case, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not fraudulent activity is performed by confirming the identification indications attached to at least two of the control board, the first member, and the second member. . For example, even if the control board is replaced with another control board by fraud, is the identification display given to at least two of the control board, the first member, and the second member related? By judging whether or not, the inspector can easily confirm that the illegal act has been performed. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of cheating can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the invention D includes storage means (502) in which stored contents that affect the result of the game provided on the control board are stored, and at least the first member and the storage means include The gist is that the identification display is attached.

  In this case, the inspector can confirm at least the identification indications given to the first member and the storage means, and can easily confirm whether or not fraudulent activity is performed. For example, even when the storage means is replaced with another storage means due to an illegal act, the examiner determines whether or not the identification indication given to at least the first member and the storage means is related. Can easily confirm that fraud has been performed. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of cheating can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention E-1]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention E-1, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game is connected to the main control means (2500), and according to the signal from the main control means (2500) LED (4045, 4945) displays any of the reserved symbols for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the reserved memory for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol The display means (2408, 2420) includes a display board (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted. And a cover member covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are mounted 4202, 5102, 5710) and the front side of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), and the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) is individually or two or more of the LEDs (4045, 4945). Identification means (4220, 5120) that can be identified as a combination of light emission modes, and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) penetrates the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth and the LED A window (4206, 5106, 5740) formed corresponding to (4045, 4945) is defined, and the state of the LED (4405, 4945) corresponding to the window (4206, 5106, 5740) is defined as the window (4206). , 5106, 5740) can be distinguished from each other. 2), and the identification means (4220, 5120) is provided on the front side of the window (4206, 5106, 5740), and is a first region (4222) capable of transmitting light or affecting the transmitted light. , 5126, 5132) and the second region (4224, 5128, 5128) provided around the first region (4222, 5126, 5132) and less transmitting light than the first region (4222, 5126, 5132). 5134) and a combination area (4226, 4804) displayed in the second area (4224, 5128, 5134) and indicating a light emission mode of two or more of the LEDs (4045, 4945) as a combination, and the display The means (2408, 2420) includes the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5). 710) is difficult to remove, the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble, or the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled. The present invention is characterized in that a removal trace remains on any one of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800).

◆ [Invention E-2]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention E-2, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game, the special symbol acquired from the main control means (2500), and the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol , Connected to the effect control means (2520) for producing an effect based on information on the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, or the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, and the effect control means (2520) And a display means (2408, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (4045, 4945) in response to a signal from the effect control means (2520), wherein the display means (2408, 2420). ) Display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs Cover members (4202, 5102, 5710) covering the front surface of the display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the EDs (4045, 4945) are mounted, and disposed on the front side of the cover members (4202, 5102, 5710). And an identification means (4220, 5120) capable of identifying the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of the two or more LEDs (4045, 4945), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) define a window (4206, 5106, 5740) which penetrates the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth and is formed corresponding to the LED (4045, 4945). , The LED (404 corresponding to the window (4206, 5106, 5740)) , 4945) can be distinguished for each window (4206, 5106, 5740), and the identification means (4220, 5120) includes the window (4206, 5120). 5106, 5740) around the first region (4222, 5126, 5132) and the first region (4222, 5126, 5132) that can transmit light or influence the transmitted light. Provided in the second area (4224, 5128, 5134), which is less likely to transmit light than the first area (4222, 5126, 5132) and the second area (4224, 5128, 5134). A combination area (4226, 4804) indicating a combination of light emission modes of the LEDs (4045, 4945), and the display means (24 08, 2420), the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) is difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled, either the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) or the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) It is characterized in that it is configured to leave a trace of removal.

◆ [Invention F-1]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention F-1, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game is connected to the main control means (2500), and according to the signal from the main control means (2500) LED (4045, 4945) displays any of the reserved symbols for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the reserved memory for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol The display means (2408, 2420) includes a display board (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted. And a cover member covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are mounted 4202, 5102, 5710), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) penetrates the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth and corresponds to the LED (4045, 4945). A window defining unit configured to partition the formed windows (4206, 5106, 5740) and distinguish the states of the LEDs (4405, 4945) corresponding to the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) for each window. (4212, 5112), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) is disposed on the rear side of the covering member (4800) that fills the front and rear regions of the gaming machine (2301) on the front side of the game board (2310). Attached to the covering member (4800), and on the front side of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), Surrounding the first region (4222, 5126, 5132) disposed on the front side of (4206, 5106, 5740) is provided a second region (4224, 5128, 5134) that hardly transmits light, and the first region Identification means (4220, 5120) capable of identifying the state of the LED (4045, 4945) corresponding to the window (4206, 5106, 5740) via the region (4222, 5126, 5132) is arranged, and the display means (2408, 2420) is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202). , 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble, or the display means (2408, 2420). ) Is disassembled, so that traces of removal remain on either the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) or the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800).

◆ [Invention F-2]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention F-2, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game, the special symbol acquired from the main control means (2500), and the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol , Connected to the effect control means (2520) for producing an effect based on information on the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, or the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, and the effect control means (2520) And a display means (2408, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (4045, 4945) in response to a signal from the effect control means (2520), wherein the display means (2408, 2420). ) Display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs A cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which an ED (4045, 4945) is mounted, and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) A window (4206, 5106, 5740) formed corresponding to the LED (4405, 4945) is defined by penetrating the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth, and the window (4206, 5106, 5740). ) Corresponding to the window (4212, 5112), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) includes the game. Placed on the back side of the covering member (4800) that fills the front and back area of the front side of the game board (2310) of the machine (2301) The first region (4222, 5126, 5132) is attached to the covering member (4800), and is disposed on the front side of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and on the front side of the window (4206, 5106, 5740). ) And a second region (4224, 5128, 5134) that is difficult to transmit light is provided, and corresponds to the window (4206, 5106, 5740) via the first region (4222, 5126, 5132). Identification means (4220, 5120) capable of identifying the state of the LED (4045, 4945) is arranged, and the display means (2408, 2420) includes the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) as the cover member. (4202, 5102, 5710) difficult to remove from the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) ) And the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the display substrate (4200) , 5100, 5800) so that a trace of removal remains.

◆ [Invention G-1]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention G-1, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game is connected to the main control means (2500), and according to the signal from the main control means (2500) LED (4045, 4945) displays any of the reserved symbols for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the reserved memory for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol The display means (2408, 2420) includes a display board (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted. And a cover member covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are mounted 4202, 5102, 5710), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) penetrates the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth and corresponds to the LED (4045, 4945). The formed windows (4206, 5106, 5740) are partitioned, and the states of the LEDs (4405, 4945) corresponding to the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) can be distinguished for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740). The display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) includes a front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the display substrate (4200, 5100). , 5800) the peripheral surface is housed inside the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), and the front A protective member (4204) covering the rear surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) housed in the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) is the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) or the display substrate ( 4200, 5100, 5800), and the display means (2408, 2420) is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710). (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and Any of the display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) It is characterized in that it is configured to leave a trace of removal.

◆ [Invention G-2]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention G-2, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game, the special symbol acquired from the main control means (2500), and the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol , Connected to the effect control means (2520) for producing an effect based on information on the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, or the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, and the effect control means (2520) And a display means (2408, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (4045, 4945) in response to a signal from the effect control means (2520), wherein the display means (2408, 2420). ) Display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs A cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which an ED (4045, 4945) is mounted, and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) A window (4206, 5106, 5740) formed corresponding to the LED (4405, 4945) is defined by penetrating the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth, and the window (4206, 5106, 5740). ) Corresponding to each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), a window defining part (4212, 5112) configured to be distinguishable for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) are the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the display substrate. (4200,5100,5800) the peripheral surface is accommodated inside the cover member (4202,5102,5710),
A protective member (4204) covering the rear surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) housed in the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) is the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) or the display substrate. (4200, 5100, 5800) and the display means (2408, 2420) is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710). It is difficult to reassemble the substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), or the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) when the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled. And any of the display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) Wherein the traces of crab removal configured to remain.

◆ [Invention H-1]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention H-1, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (2500) are connected, and according to the signal from the main control means (2500) LED (4045, 4945) displays any of the reserved symbols for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the reserved memory for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol The display means (2408, 2420) includes a display board (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted. And a cover member covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are mounted 4202, 5102, 5710), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) penetrates the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth and corresponds to the LED (4045, 4945). The formed windows (4206, 5106, 5740) are partitioned, and the states of the LEDs (4405, 4945) corresponding to the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) can be distinguished for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740). The cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) includes the window defining part (4212, 5112) and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800). In combination with the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) so as to face the front surface, The entire circumference of the LEDs (4045, 4945) mounted on the front surface of the circuit board (4200, 5100, 5800) is individually surrounded by the window defining part (4212, 5112), and the cover members (4202, 5102, 5710) Identification means (4220, 5120) attached to the front surface so as to cover the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) and capable of identifying the light emission mode of the LEDs (4406, 5946, 4945) for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) The identification means (4220, 5120) includes a first layer (4230, 5130, 5136) that easily transmits light, and the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) in the cover members (4202, 5102, 5710). ) Is placed on the front side of the area other than the first layer (4230, 5130, 5136), And the second layer (4232, 5131, 5138) which is less likely to transmit light than the first layer (4230, 5130, 5136), and the display means (2408, 2420) includes the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble, or When the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) are configured to leave traces of removal. And

◆ [Invention H-2]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention H-2, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game, the special symbol acquired from the main control means (2500), and the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol , Connected to the effect control means (2520) for producing an effect based on information on the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, or the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, and the effect control means (2520) And a display means (2408, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (4045, 4945) in response to a signal from the effect control means (2520), wherein the display means (2408, 2420). ) Display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs A cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which an ED (4045, 4945) is mounted, and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) A window (4206, 5106, 5740) formed corresponding to the LED (4405, 4945) is defined by penetrating the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth, and the window (4206, 5106, 5740). ) Corresponding to each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) and a window defining part (4212, 5112) configured to be distinguishable for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), and the cover members (4202, 5102). , 5710) is configured such that the window defining unit (4212, 5112) is the display substrate (4200, 51). 0,5800) All the LEDs (4045,4945) mounted on the front surface of the display substrate (4200,5100,5800) are combined with the display substrate (4200,5100,5800) so as to face the front surface. The periphery is individually enclosed by the window defining part (4212, 5112) and attached to the front surface of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) so as to cover the window (4206, 5106, 5740), and the LED (4045, 5405). 4945) has a discriminating means (4220, 5120) capable of discriminating each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), and the discriminating means (4220, 5120) is a first layer that easily transmits light ( 4230, 5130, 5136) and the window (42) in the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710). The second layer which is disposed on the front side of the region other than the regions other than 06, 5106, 5740 and overlaps the first layer (4230, 5130, 5136) and is less likely to transmit light than the first layer (4230, 5130, 5136). (4232, 5131, 5138), the display means (2408, 2420) is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), the display The substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble or when the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710). ) And the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800). Characterized in that was.

◆ [Invention I-1]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention I-1, it is connected to the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (2500), and according to the signal from the main control means (2500) LED (4045, 4945) displays any of the reserved symbols for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the reserved memory for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol The display means (2408, 2420) includes a display board (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted. And a cover member covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are mounted 4202, 5102, 5710), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) penetrates the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth and corresponds to the LED (4045, 4945). The formed windows (4206, 5106, 5740) are partitioned, and the states of the LEDs (4405, 4945) corresponding to the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) can be distinguished for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740). And a covering member (4212, 5112) configured to be attached to the gaming board (2310) of the gaming machine (2301) in a replaceable manner and bury the front and rear regions on the front side of the gaming board (2310). 4800) covers the front side of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the cover member (42). 2, 5102, 5710) is provided on the covering member (4800), and the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are individually or two or more of the LEDs (4045, 4945). The display means (2408, 2420) has the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) separated from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710). It is difficult to remove, the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble, or the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled and the cover member ( 4202, 5102, 5710) and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) It is characterized in that it is configured such that a trace of removal remains in any of them.

◆ [Invention I-2]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention I-2, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game, the special symbol acquired from the main control means (2500), and the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol , Connected to the effect control means (2520) for producing an effect based on information on the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, or the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, and the effect control means (2520) And a display means (2408, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (4045, 4945) in response to a signal from the effect control means (2520), wherein the display means (2408, 2420). ) Display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs A cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which an ED (4045, 4945) is mounted, and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) A window (4206, 5106, 5740) formed corresponding to the LED (4405, 4945) is defined by penetrating the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth, and the window (4206, 5106, 5740). ) Corresponding to each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), a window defining part (4212, 5112) configured to be distinguishable for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), and the gaming machine (2301) Cover which is attached to the game board (2310) in an exchangeable manner and fills the front and rear areas on the front side of the game board (2310) The material (4800) covers the front side of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), is provided on the covering member (4800) and is located on the front side of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), The display means (2408, 2420) includes identification means (4220, 5120) that can identify the light emission modes of the LEDs (4045, 4945) individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of the two or more LEDs (4045, 4945). The display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710). Difficult to reassemble or disassemble the display means (2408, 2420) In this case, the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) are configured to leave traces of removal.

◆ [Invention J-1]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention J-1, it is connected to the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (2500), and according to the signal from the main control means (2500) LED (4045, 4945) displays any of the reserved symbols for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the reserved memory for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol The display means (2408, 2420) includes a display board (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted. And a cover member covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are mounted 4202, 5102, 5710), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) penetrates the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth and corresponds to the LED (4045, 4945). The formed windows (4206, 5106, 5740) are partitioned, and the states of the LEDs (4405, 4945) corresponding to the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) can be distinguished for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740). And a cover member (4800) that is attached to the game board (2310) of the gaming machine (2301) and fills the front and rear regions of the game board (2310 front side). Covering the front side of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), the covering member (4800) Located on the front side of the bar member (4202, 5102, 5710) and attached to the front surface of the covering member (4800), the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) is individually or two or more of the LEDs (4045, 4945) ) That can be identified as a combination of light emission modes, and the identification means (4220, 5120) provided on the front surface of the covering member (4800) and attached to the front surface of the covering member (4800). The display means (2408, 2420) is detached from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800). Difficult, the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102) 5710) is difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled, either the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) or the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) It is configured to leave a trace of removal.

◆ [Invention J-2]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention J-2, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game, the special symbol acquired from the main control means (2500), and the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol , Connected to the effect control means (2520) for producing an effect based on information on the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, or the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, and the effect control means (2520) And a display means (2408, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (4045, 4945) in response to a signal from the effect control means (2520), wherein the display means (2408, 2420). ) Display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs A cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which an ED (4045, 4945) is mounted, and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) A window (4206, 5106, 5740) formed corresponding to the LED (4405, 4945) is defined by penetrating the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth, and the window (4206, 5106, 5740). ) Corresponding to each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), a window defining part (4212, 5112) configured to be distinguishable for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), and the gaming machine (2301) A cover member (480 that is attached to the game board (2310) and fills the front and rear regions of the game board (2310 front side) ) To cover the front side of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), and the covering member (4800) is located on the front side of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and is on the front surface of the covering member (4800). Identification means (4220, 5120) attached and capable of identifying the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs (4045, 4945); and the covering member ( 4800) and a protection part (4808) covering the peripheral surface of the identification means (4220, 5120) attached to the front surface of the covering member (4800), and the display means (2408, 2420) ), The display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) is connected to the cover member (4202, 5102, 57). 10) Difficult to remove from the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled The present invention is characterized in that a removal trace remains on any one of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800).

◆ [Invention K-1]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention K-1, it is connected to the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (2500), and according to the signal from the main control means (2500) LED (4045, 4945) displays any of the reserved symbols for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the reserved memory for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol The display means (2408, 2420) includes a display board (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted. And a cover member covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are mounted 4202, 5102, 5710), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) penetrates the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth and corresponds to the LED (4045, 4945). The formed windows (4206, 5106, 5740) are partitioned, and the states of the LEDs (4405, 4945) corresponding to the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) can be distinguished for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740). And a covering member (4800) that has a window defining part (4212, 5112) configured in the above and is attached to the gaming board (2310) of the gaming machine (2301) and fills the front and rear regions on the front side of the gaming board (2310) , Covering the front side of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the cover member (4202, 51). 2, 5710) by means of identification means (5120) having a first identification part (5122) provided on the front surface and a second identification part (5124) provided on the covering member (4800), the plurality of LEDs ( 4045, 4945) can be identified individually or as a combination of two or more LEDs (4045, 4945), and the display means (2408, 2420) includes the display substrate (4200). , 5100, 5800) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble, or When the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled, the cover members (4202, 5102, 571) are disassembled. 0) and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800).

◆ [Invention K-2]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention K-2, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game, the special symbol acquired from the main control means (2500), and the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol , Connected to the effect control means (2520) for producing an effect based on information on the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, or the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, and the effect control means (2520) And a display means (2408, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (4045, 4945) in response to a signal from the effect control means (2520), wherein the display means (2408, 2420). ) Display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs A cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which an ED (4045, 4945) is mounted, and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) A window (4206, 5106, 5740) formed corresponding to the LED (4405, 4945) is defined by penetrating the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth, and the window (4206, 5106, 5740). ) Corresponding to each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), a window defining part (4212, 5112) configured to be distinguishable for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), and the gaming machine (2301) A covering member (48) which is attached to the game board (2310) and fills the front and rear regions on the front side of the game board (2310) 0) to cover the front side of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and to the first identification part (5122) provided on the front surface of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the covering member (4800) By the identification means (5120) having the second identification part (5124) provided, the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are individually or in combination of the light emission modes of the two or more LEDs (4045, 4945). The display means (2408, 2420) is configured such that the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), and the display substrate ( 4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are reassembled. Difficult to set up or when the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled, a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) or the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) It is configured as described above.

◆ [Invention L-1]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention L-1, it is connected to the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (2500), and according to the signal from the main control means (2500) LED (4045, 4945) displays any of the reserved symbols for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the reserved memory for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol The display means (2408, 2420) includes a display board (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted. And a cover member covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are mounted 4202, 5102, 5710), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) penetrates the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth and corresponds to the LED (4045, 4945). The formed windows (4206, 5106, 5740) are partitioned, and the states of the LEDs (4405, 4945) corresponding to the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) can be distinguished for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740). And the window (4206, 5102, 5710) on the front surface of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) on the front surface of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710). Identification means (4220, 5120) formed in accordance with the shape of the region where The identification means (4220, 5120) is attached to the first region (4222, 5126, 5132) disposed on the front side of the window (4206, 5106, 5740) and hardly transmits light. Two regions (4224, 5128, 5134) are provided, and the state of the LEDs (4045, 4945) corresponding to the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) through the first region (4222, 5126, 5132) is changed. The display means (2408, 2420) is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble, or the display hand When the step (2408, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) are configured to leave traces of removal. To do.

◆ [Invention L-2]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention L-2, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game, the special symbol acquired from the main control means (2500), and the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol , Connected to the effect control means (2520) for producing an effect based on information on the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, or the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, and the effect control means (2520) And a display means (2408, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (4045, 4945) in response to a signal from the effect control means (2520), wherein the display means (2408, 2420). ) Display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs A cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which an ED (4045, 4945) is mounted, and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) A window (4206, 5106, 5740) formed corresponding to the LED (4405, 4945) is defined by penetrating the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth, and the window (4206, 5106, 5740). ) Corresponding to each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) and a window defining part (4212, 5112) configured to be distinguishable for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), and the cover members (4202, 5102). , 5710) on the front surface is the front of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) front surface. Identification means (4220, 5120) formed in accordance with the shape of the region in which the window (4206, 5106, 5740) is opened is attached, and the window (4206, 5106, 5740) is attached to the identification means (4220, 5120). A second region (4224, 5128, 5134) that hardly transmits light is provided so as to surround the first region (4222, 5126, 5132) arranged in front of the first region (4222, 5126, 5132). ) Can identify the state of the LED (4405, 4945) corresponding to the window (4206, 5106, 5740), and the display means (2408, 2420) can display the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), the display substrate (420) 0, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the cover member The present invention is characterized in that the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) is configured to leave a trace of removal.

◆ [Invention M-1]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention M-1, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game is connected to the main control means (2500), and in response to a signal from the main control means (2500) LED (4045, 4945) displays any of the reserved symbols for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the reserved memory for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol The display means (2408, 2420) includes a display board (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted. And a cover member covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are mounted 4202, 5102, 5710) and a protective member (4204) that covers the rear surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) housed in the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), and the cover member ( 4202, 5102, 5710) pass through the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth and define windows (4206, 5106, 5740) formed corresponding to the LEDs (4045, 4945), A window defining part (4212, 5112) configured to distinguish the state of the LED (4405, 4945) corresponding to the window (4206, 5106, 5740) for each window (4206, 5106, 5740); The cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the protective member (4204) An engaging portion (4214) provided on one of the member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the protective member (4204) is attached to the other of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the protective member (4204). Either of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the protection member (4204) when fitted to the engagement receiving portion (4216) provided and difficult to remove from each other, difficult to reassemble, or disassembled. It is configured to leave a trace of crab removal.

◆ [Invention M-2]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention M-2, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game, the special symbol acquired from the main control means (2500), and the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol , Connected to the effect control means (2520) for producing an effect based on information on the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, or the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, and the effect control means (2520) And a display means (2408, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (4045, 4945) in response to a signal from the effect control means (2520), wherein the display means (2408, 2420). ) Display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs A cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which an ED (4045, 4945) is mounted, and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) housed in the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710). A protective member (4204) that covers the rear surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) penetrates the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth. In addition, a window (4206, 5106, 5740) formed corresponding to the LED (4405, 4945) is partitioned, and the state of the LED (4405, 4945) corresponding to the window (4206, 5106, 5740) Window defining unit (421) configured to be distinguishable for each window (4206, 5106, 5740) , 5112), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the protection member (4204) are provided on one of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the protection member (4204). The mating portion (4214) is fitted and combined with an engagement receiving portion (4216) provided on the other of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the protective member (4204), and is difficult to remove from each other. When it is difficult or when disassembled, any one of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the protective member (4204) is configured to leave a trace of removal.

◆ [Invention N-1]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention N-1, it is connected to the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (2500), and according to the signal from the main control means (2500) LED (4045, 4945) displays any of the reserved symbols for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the reserved memory for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol The display means (2408, 2420) includes a display board (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted. And a cover member covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are mounted 4202, 5102, 5710), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) penetrates the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth and corresponds to the LED (4045, 4945). The formed windows (4206, 5106, 5740) are partitioned, and the states of the LEDs (4405, 4945) corresponding to the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) can be distinguished for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740). The window defining portion (4212, 5112) configured as described above and the window defining portion (4212, 5112) facing the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) are protruded rearward from the rear surface. The display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) is formed integrally with the window defining part (4212, 5112). Positioning portions (4600, 5300) that can be fitted into the formed substrate holes (4400, 5300) and can align the display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) with respect to the cover members (4202, 5102, 5710). 5400), the display means (2408, 2420) is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), and the display substrate (4200, 2410). 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the display member Configured to leave a trace of removal on any of the substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) It is characterized by that.

◆ [Invention N-2]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention N-2, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game, the special symbol acquired from the main control means (2500), and the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol , Connected to the effect control means (2520) for producing an effect based on information on the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, or the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, and the effect control means (2520) And a display means (2408, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (4045, 4945) in response to a signal from the effect control means (2520), wherein the display means (2408, 2420). ) Display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs A cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which an ED (4045, 4945) is mounted, and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) A window (4206, 5106, 5740) formed corresponding to the LED (4405, 4945) is defined by penetrating the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) forward and backward, and the window (4206, 5106, 5740). ) Corresponding to each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), a window defining unit (4212, 5112) configured to be distinguishable for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the window defining part (4212, 5112) facing the front surface. Are integrally formed with the window defining portion (4212, 5112) and are fitted into the substrate holes (4400, 5300) formed in the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800), and the cover member ( 4202, 5102, 5710) and an alignment section (4600, 5400) capable of aligning the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) with the display means (2408, 2420). The substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are reassembled. Difficult or when the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (4202, 51 02, 5710) and any one of the display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800).

◆ [Invention O-1]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention O-1, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game is connected to the main control means (2500), and in response to a signal from the main control means (2500) LED (4045, 4945) displays any of the reserved symbols for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the reserved memory for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol The display means (2408, 2420) includes a display board (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted. And a cover member covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are mounted 4202, 5102, 5710) and current limiting means (4500) which is surface-mounted on the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and controls the current supplied to the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945). The cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) penetrates the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) forward and backward, and is formed in correspondence with the LED (4045, 4945) (4206, 4945). 5106, 5740), and the state of the LEDs (4405, 4945) corresponding to the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) can be distinguished for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740). (4212, 5112), and the display means (2408, 2420) includes the display substrate (4200). 5100, 5800) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble, or When the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) are configured to leave traces of removal. And

◆ [Invention O-2]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention O-2, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game, the special symbol acquired from the main control means (2500), and the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol , Connected to the effect control means (2520) for producing an effect based on information on the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, or the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, and the effect control means (2520) And a display means (2408, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (4045, 4945) in response to a signal from the effect control means (2520), wherein the display means (2408, 2420). ) Display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs Cover members (4202, 5102, 5710) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the ED (4045, 4945) is mounted, and surface mounted on the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800). Current limiting means (4500) for controlling the current supplied to the plurality of LEDs (4405, 4945), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) includes the cover member (4202, 5102). , 5710) forward and backward, and partitions the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) formed corresponding to the LEDs (4405, 4945), and the LEDs (4606, 5106, 5740) corresponding to the windows (4206, 5106, 5740). 4045, 4945) can be distinguished for each window (4206, 5106, 5740). The display means (2408, 2420) is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), It is difficult to reassemble the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), or the cover member (4202, 5102) when the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled. , 5710) and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800).

◆ [Invention P-1]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention P-1, it is connected to the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (2500), and according to the signal from the main control means (2500) LED (4045, 4945) displays any of the reserved symbols for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the reserved memory for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol The display means (2408, 2420) includes a display board (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted. And a cover member covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) are mounted 4202, 5102, 5710), and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) penetrates the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth and corresponds to the LED (4045, 4945). The formed windows (4206, 5106, 5740) are partitioned, and the states of the LEDs (4405, 4945) corresponding to the windows (4206, 5106, 5740) can be distinguished for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740). The main control means (2500) has a plurality of LEDs (4045, 4945) surface-mounted on the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800). Current limiting means (5500, 5600) for controlling the current supplied to the display means (24) 8, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) from the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710), the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) is difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (2408, 2420) is disassembled, either the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) or the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) It is characterized in that it is configured to leave a trace of removal.

◆ [Invention P-2]
In the gaming machine (2301) of the invention P-2, the main control means (2500) for controlling the progress of the game, the special symbol acquired from the main control means (2500), and the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol , Connected to the effect control means (2520) for producing an effect based on information on the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, or the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, and the effect control means (2520) And a display means (2408, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (4045, 4945) in response to a signal from the effect control means (2520), wherein the display means (2408, 2420). ) Display substrates (4200, 5100, 5800) on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045, 4945) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs A cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) on which an ED (4045, 4945) is mounted, and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) A window (4206, 5106, 5740) formed corresponding to the LED (4405, 4945) is defined by penetrating the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) back and forth, and the window (4206, 5106, 5740). ) Corresponding to each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), the window defining part (4212, 5112) configured to be distinguishable for each of the windows (4206, 5106, 5740), and the effect control means (2520) The plurality of LEDs (40 mounted on the surface of the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800)) 5, 4945), current limiting means (5500, 5600) for controlling the current supplied to the display means (2408, 2420), the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) being covered by the cover. It is difficult to remove from the member (4202, 5102, 5710), the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) and the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) are difficult to reassemble, or the display means (2408, 2420) It is characterized in that, when disassembling, any one of the cover member (4202, 5102, 5710) and the display substrate (4200, 5100, 5800) is left with a trace of removal.

  In addition, various modifications can be added and implemented without departing from the spirit of the present invention, and the present invention can be applied to various gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines. For example, you may comprise the gaming machine which combined a part of each said Example, a change form, and a modification.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
44a Big hit determination means (determination means)
70 Effect control means 71 Fluctuation effect control means 71b First change effect control means (first effect control means)
71c Second variation effect control means (second effect control means)

The first invention (the gaming machine (1)) is a judging means for judging whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is performed in a gaming machine having a variable start area (11a) that can be opened and closed (44 (44a)). ) And an effect control means (70) for executing a game effect and a control for opening and closing the variable start area (11a) based on the determination result by the determination means (44) and the first and second games, which are different from each other Game state control means (60) that can be controlled to any of the states, and the effect control means (70) is capable of executing a plurality of specific effects (for example, effects shown in FIG. 20). When the plurality of specific effects are executed by the effect control means (71b) and the first effect control means (71b), a first notification is made that at least one of the plurality of specific effects is performed. Second effect control means (71c) capable of executing two game effects (for example, the effects shown in FIG. 35) The second effect control means (71c) has the second game effect in any of a plurality of notification modes (for example, notification modes 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 28) having different degrees of expectation for performing the special game. Can be executed, and in the second game effect, the first predetermined number of times (for example, any one or two) specific effects are performed in advance, and the first predetermined number of times The degree of expectation is different from the case where the second specific number of times (for example, any one of 3 to 5 times) of specific effects are notified in advance, and from the start to the end of the second game effect. The display color of the second game effect may or may not change from the first display color to the second display color. When the display color changes to the second display color, the degree of expectation is higher than when the display color does not change. higher than (e.g., FIG. 37), the second Yu Effect, the first gaming state (e.g., "probability variation gaming state") than when it is determined not to perform special game by the determination means in (44), before Symbol second gaming state (e.g., "normal game state ]), It is easier to execute when it is determined by the determination means (44) that the special game is not performed.

The present invention (gaming machine (1)) includes a judging means (44 (44a)) for judging whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to a player in a gaming machine having a variable start area (11a) that can be opened and closed. Based on the determination result by the determination means (44), the effect control means (70) for executing the game effect and the control for opening and closing the variable start area (11a) are different from each other in the first and second game states. A game state control means (60) that can be controlled in any way, and the effect control means (70) is capable of executing a plurality of specific effects (for example, the effects shown in FIG. 20). and means (71b), when the previous SL more specific effect is executed, the second game effects to pre notifying that at least one specific effect among the plurality of specific effect takes place (for example, effect shown in Figure 35 ) Can be executed, and the second effect control means (71c) The second game effect can be executed in any of a plurality of notification modes (for example, notification modes 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 28) having different degrees of expectation for performing the special game, and in the second game effect, In the case of the first notification mode in which it is notified in advance that a specific effect for one predetermined number of times (for example, any one or two times) is performed, and a second predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 3) different from the first predetermined number of times. The expectation differs from that in the second notification mode in which it is notified in advance that any one of the five specific effects will be performed, and the second game effect is from the start to the end of the second game effect. Is executed in the first notification mode, and is switched to the second notification mode during execution in the first notification mode, and the display color of the first and second notification modes is changed from the first display color to the second display mode. is better to change the color, the second display color The more people that do not change the degree of expectation increases (e.g., FIG. 37), the second game effects is carried out a special game by the first game status (e.g., "probability variation gaming state") the determination means in (44) In the second game state (for example, “normal game state”), it is easier to execute when it is determined that a special game is not performed by the determination means (44). To do.

Claims (2)

Determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, provided with an effect control means for executing a game effect,
The production control means includes
A first effect control means capable of executing a plurality of specific effects;
When the plurality of specific effects are executed by the first effect control means, it is possible to execute a second game effect that notifies in advance that at least one of the plurality of specific effects is performed. 2 production control means,
The second effect control means includes:
The second game effect can be executed in any of a plurality of notification modes having different expectations for performing the special game,
In the second game effect, when notifying in advance that the specific effect for the first predetermined number of times will be performed, and notifying in advance that the specific effect for the second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times will be performed. And the expectation is different,
The second game effect is
The case where it is determined that the special game is not performed by the determination unit in the second game state different from the first game state than the case where the determination unit determines that the special game is not performed in the first game state. A gaming machine that is easy to execute. The second game effect is
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is not executed when it is determined that the special game is not performed in the first gaming state. 3.